Saturn Automobile 2008 Aura Hybrid User Guide

2008 Saturn AURA Green Line Hybrid Owner Manual M  
OnStar® System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using this Manual  
{CAUTION:  
Many people read the owner manual from beginning  
to end when they first receive their new vehicle to  
learn about the vehicle’s features and controls.  
Pictures and words work together to explain things.  
These mean there is something that could hurt  
you or other people.  
Index  
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help  
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.  
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.  
A good place to quickly locate information about the  
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is  
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and  
the page number where it can be found.  
A circle with a slash  
through it is a safety  
symbol which means  
“Do Not,” “Do Not do  
this” or “Do Not let  
this happen.”  
Safety Warnings and Symbols  
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.  
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about  
things that could hurt you or others if you were to  
ignore the warning.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Damage Warnings  
Vehicle Symbols  
You will also find notices in this manual.  
The vehicle has components and labels that use  
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along  
with the text describing the operation or information  
relating to a specific component, control, message,  
gage, or indicator.  
Notice: These mean there is something that could  
damage your vehicle.  
A notice tells about something that can damage the  
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered  
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.  
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.  
When you read other manuals, you might see  
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors  
or in different words.  
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which  
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 1  
Seats and Restraint Systems  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front Seats  
Manual Seats  
{CAUTION:  
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to  
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle  
is moving. The sudden movement could startle  
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal  
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s  
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.  
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock  
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release  
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be  
sure the seat is locked in place.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Seats  
Manual Lumbar  
On vehicles with this  
feature, the handle is  
located on the outboard  
side of the seat.  
Move the handle up or down repeatedly to decrease  
or increase lumbar support.  
In vehicles with power seats, the controls used to operate  
them are located on the outboard side of the seat.  
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:  
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the  
control forward or rearward.  
Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by  
moving the front of the control up or down.  
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by  
moving the rear of the control up or down.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever  
used to operate them is located on the outboard  
side of the seat.  
Reclining Seatbacks  
Manual Reclining Seatbacks  
{CAUTION:  
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to  
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle  
is moving. The sudden movement could startle  
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal  
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s  
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.  
{CAUTION:  
To recline the seatback, do the following:  
1. Lift the recline lever.  
If the seatback is not locked, it could move  
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could  
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always  
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is  
locked.  
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then  
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.  
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure  
it is locked.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To return the seatback to an upright position,  
do the following:  
Power Reclining Seatbacks  
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure  
to the seatback and the seatback returns to  
the upright position.  
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback.  
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure  
it is locked.  
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control  
used to recline them is located on the outboard side  
of the seat behind the power seat control.  
To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control  
rearward.  
To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the  
control forward.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle  
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you  
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their  
job when you are reclined like this.  
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,  
you could go into it, receiving neck or other  
injuries.  
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash  
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The  
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic  
bones. This could cause serious internal  
injuries.  
For proper protection when the vehicle is in  
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit  
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt  
properly.  
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pull the restraint up to  
raise it. To lower the  
Head Restraints  
head restraint, press the  
button, located on the  
top of the seatback, and  
push the restraint down.  
The rear seat head rests are also adjustable.  
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint  
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s  
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury  
in a crash.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Lift Seat  
Rear Seats  
Split Folding Rear Seat  
With this feature, you can fold either side of the seatback  
down for more cargo space. Make sure the front seat  
is not reclined. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold  
down all the way.  
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts  
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or  
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts  
and return them to their normal stowed position  
before folding a rear seat.  
To adjust a power lift seat, press the top or bottom of  
the power lift seat switch to raise or lower the seat.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not  
properly attached, or twisted will not provide  
the protection needed in a crash. The person  
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.  
After raising the rear seatback, always check  
to be sure that the safety belts are properly  
routed and attached, and are not twisted.  
{CAUTION:  
To lower the rear seatback, pull on the seat tab located  
on the outboard side of the seatback cushion and  
fold the seatback down. This allows access to the trunk.  
If the seatback is not locked, it could move  
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could  
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always  
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it  
is locked.  
To raise the rear seatback pull the seatback up and  
make sure it latches. Push and pull on the seatback  
to be sure it is locked in position. Make sure that  
the safety belts are properly stowed over the seatback  
in all three positions.  
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the  
upright locked position.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Belts  
{CAUTION:  
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo  
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a  
collision, people riding in these areas are more  
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not  
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle  
that is not equipped with seats and safety  
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in  
a seat and using a safety belt properly.  
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety  
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should  
not do with safety belts.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot  
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a  
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,  
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit  
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected  
from it and be seriously injured or killed.  
In the same crash, you might not be, if you  
are buckled up. Always fasten your safety  
belt, and check that your passenger(s) are  
restrained properly too.  
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your  
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-28.  
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the  
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:  
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have  
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.  
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so  
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.  
But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people  
who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away.  
Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.  
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,  
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does  
matter... a lot!  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Why Safety Belts Work  
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.  
Put someone on it.  
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat  
on wheels.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.  
The rider does not stop.  
The person keeps going until stopped by something.  
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or the instrument panel...  
or the safety belts!  
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.  
You get more time to stop. You stop over more  
distance, and your strongest bones take the forces.  
That is why safety belts make such good sense.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Questions and Answers About  
Safety Belts  
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from  
home, why should I wear safety belts?  
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in  
a crash — even one that is not your fault — you  
and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a  
good driver does not protect you from things  
beyond your control, such as bad drivers.  
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if  
I am wearing a safety belt?  
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety  
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious  
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle  
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.  
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you  
are upside down.  
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)  
of home. And the greatest number of serious  
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than  
40 mph (65 km/h).  
Safety belts are for everyone.  
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have  
to wear safety belts?  
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they  
work with safety belts — not instead of them.  
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants  
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.  
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but  
especially in side and other collisions.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly  
This section is only for people of adult size.  
Be aware that there are special things to know about  
safety belts and children. And there are different  
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be  
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-29  
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-32. Follow  
those rules for everyone’s protection.  
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.  
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often  
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.  
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out  
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others  
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.  
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety  
belt, there is important information you should know.  
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor  
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be  
worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the  
thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic  
bones and you would be less likely to slide under the  
lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on  
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal  
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder  
and across the chest. These parts of the body are  
best able to take belt restraining forces.  
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder  
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move  
forward too much, which could increase injury.  
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against  
your body.  
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as  
much protection this way.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is  
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under  
the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.  
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.  
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on  
the hips, just touching the thighs.  
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as  
much protection this way.  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt is  
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,  
the belt would go up over your abdomen.  
The belt forces would be there, not on the  
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal  
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the  
buckle nearest you.  
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes  
over an armrest like this. The belt would be  
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under  
the belt. The belt force would then be applied  
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones,  
and that could cause serious or fatal injuries.  
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.  
A: The belt is over an armrest.  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if you wear the  
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your  
body would move too far forward, which would  
increase the chance of head and neck injury.  
Also, the belt would apply too much force to  
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder  
bones. You could also severely injure internal  
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder  
belt should go over the shoulder and across  
the chest.  
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.  
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by not wearing  
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash,  
you would not be restrained by the shoulder  
belt. Your body could move too far forward  
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.  
You might also slide under the lap belt. The  
belt force would then be applied right on the  
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal  
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over  
the shoulder and across the chest.  
A: The belt is behind the body.  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.  
In a crash, you would not have the full width  
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt  
is twisted, make it straight so it can work  
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.  
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
All seating positions in your vehicle have a  
lap-shoulder belt.  
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.  
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you  
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in  
the Index.  
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.  
Do not let it get twisted.  
A: The belt is twisted across the body.  
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt  
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the  
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt  
across you more slowly.  
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger  
belt out all the way, you may engage the child  
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let  
the belt go back all the way and start again.  
1-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the  
shoulder belt.  
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.  
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt  
Extender on page 1-28.  
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the  
safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten  
the lap belt on smaller occupants.  
Make sure the release button on the buckle is  
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  
safety belt quickly if necessary.  
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,  
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper  
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce  
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.  
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in  
this section.  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster  
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for  
the driver and right front passenger position.  
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the  
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should  
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off  
your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment  
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in  
a crash.  
To move it up or down,  
squeeze the buttons (A)  
on the sides of the  
height adjuster and move  
the height adjuster to  
the desired position.  
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.  
The belt should go back out of the way. When the  
safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up  
the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should rest  
on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide  
loop on the side wall.  
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of  
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage  
both the belt and your vehicle.  
After you move the adjuster to where you want it,  
try to move it down without squeezing the buttons to  
make sure it has locked into position.  
1-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There is one guide for each outboard passenger position  
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide to  
the safety belt:  
Safety Belt Pretensioners  
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the front  
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,  
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help  
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a  
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if  
the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation  
are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags,  
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety  
belts in a side crash.  
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a  
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other  
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing  
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides  
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added  
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown  
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on  
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt  
away from the neck and head.  
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of  
the seatback and the interior body to remove the  
guide from its storage clip.  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the  
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.  
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.  
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the  
guide on top.  
1-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
A safety belt that is not properly worn may  
not provide the protection needed in a crash.  
The person wearing the belt could be seriously  
injured. The shoulder belt should go over  
the shoulder and across the chest. These  
parts of the body are best able to take belt  
restraining forces.  
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as  
described previously in this section. Make sure  
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.  
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the  
belt edges together so that you can take them out of  
the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage  
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the  
guide and clip inward and slide them in between  
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the  
loop of the elastic cord exposed.  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the  
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more  
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For  
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making  
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.  
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy  
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant  
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to  
be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.  
Safety Belt Extender  
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,  
you should use it.  
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your  
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you  
go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will  
wear, so the extender will be long enough for you.  
To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else  
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.  
The extender has been designed for adults. Never use  
it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the  
regular safety belt. For more information, see the  
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.  
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,  
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,  
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.  
1-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the  
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for  
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt  
until the child passes the below fit test:  
Child Restraints  
Older Children  
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend  
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to  
the booster seat.  
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder  
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no,  
try using the rear safety belt comfort guide.  
See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under  
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-22 for more  
information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest  
on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.  
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,  
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return  
to the booster seat.  
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the  
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return  
to the booster seat.  
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should  
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?  
{CAUTION:  
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and  
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can  
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face  
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the  
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies  
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.  
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which  
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries  
in a crash.  
Never do this.  
Here two children are wearing the same belt.  
The belt cannot properly spread the impact  
forces. In a crash, the two children can be  
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt  
must be used by only one person at a time.  
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under  
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-22.  
According to accident statistics, children and infants  
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating  
positions than in the front seating positions.  
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike  
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown  
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety  
belts properly.  
1-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a  
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is  
behind the child. In a crash, the child would  
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The  
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt  
force would then be applied right on the  
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal  
injuries. The child could also move too far  
forward increasing the chance of head and  
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go  
over the shoulder and across the chest.  
1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,  
they should have the protection provided by appropriate  
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly  
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of  
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not  
use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need  
to use a child restraint.  
Infants and Young Children  
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes  
infants and all other children. Neither the distance  
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes  
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.  
In fact, the law in every state in the United States  
and in every Canadian province says children up to  
some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
People should never hold an infant in their  
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does  
not weigh much — until a crash. During a  
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not  
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at  
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant  
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force  
on a person’s arms. An infant should be  
secured in an appropriate restraint.  
Children can be seriously injured or strangled  
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their  
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.  
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle  
and never allow children to play with the  
safety belts.  
1-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its  
airbag system is designed for them. Young  
children and infants need the protection that a  
child restraint system can provide.  
{CAUTION:  
Children who are up against, or very close to,  
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously  
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder  
belts offer protection for adults and older  
children, but not for young children and infants.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What are the different types of add-on child  
restraints?  
{CAUTION:  
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the  
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.  
Selection of a particular restraint should take  
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,  
and age but also whether or not the restraint will  
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which  
it will be used.  
Newborn infants need complete support,  
including support for the head and neck.  
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s  
neck is weak and its head weighs so much  
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,  
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into  
the restraint, so the crash forces can be  
distributed across the strongest part of an  
infant’s body, the back and shoulders.  
Infants should always be secured in  
For most basic types of child restraints, there are  
many different models available. When purchasing  
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be  
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will  
have a label saying that it meets federal motor  
vehicle safety standards.  
appropriate infant restraints.  
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that  
come with the restraint state the weight and  
height limitations for a particular child restraint.  
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints  
available for children with special needs.  
1-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Child Restraint Systems  
{CAUTION:  
A rear-facing infant  
seat (A) provides  
restraint with the  
seating surface  
against the back  
of the infant.  
The body structure of a young child is quite  
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom  
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s  
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s  
regular safety belt may not remain low on the  
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle  
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,  
the belt would apply force on a body area that  
is unprotected by any bony structure. This  
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.  
Young children should always be secured  
in appropriate child restraints.  
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a  
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.  
A forward-facing  
child seat (B) provides  
restraint for the  
child’s body with  
the harness.  
1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint  
in the Vehicle  
{CAUTION:  
A child can be seriously injured or killed in  
a crash if the child restraint is not properly  
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child  
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle  
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH  
system, following the instructions that came  
with that restraint, and also the instructions  
in this manual.  
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to  
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.  
A booster seat can also help a child to see out  
the window.  
1-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint  
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems  
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the  
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH  
(LATCH) on page 1-40 for more information. A child  
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint  
is not properly secured in the vehicle.  
Securing the Child Within the  
Child Restraint  
{CAUTION:  
A child can be seriously injured or killed  
in a crash if the child is not properly secured  
in the child restraint. Because there are  
different systems, it is important to refer to  
the instructions that come with the restraint.  
Make sure the child is properly secured,  
following the instructions that came with  
that restraint.  
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the  
instructions that come with the restraint which may be  
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this  
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,  
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement  
copy from the manufacturer.  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure  
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure  
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when  
no child is in it.  
1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where to Put the Restraint  
{CAUTION:  
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front  
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because  
the back of the rear-facing child restraint  
would be very close to the inflating airbag.  
We recommend that children and child restraints  
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child  
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in  
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in  
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,  
using safety belts.  
Even though the passenger sensing system is  
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s  
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing  
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and  
no one can guarantee that an airbag will not  
deploy under some unusual circumstance,  
even though it is turned off. We recommend  
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a  
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.  
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the  
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint  
in the right front seat, always move the front  
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is  
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63  
for additional information.  
1-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,  
study the instructions that came with your child restraint  
to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.  
A. Occupant prohibited  
B. Child restraint  
using LATCH  
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to  
secure the child restraint properly.  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure  
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure  
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when  
no child is in it.  
A. Child restraint  
using LATCH  
B. Child restraint or  
occupant using  
safety belt  
If you secure a child restraint in the left or center rear  
seat using LATCH, review the following illustrations.  
Depending on where you place the child restraint,  
you may not be able to access certain safety belt  
assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional passengers  
or child restraints.  
C. Child restraint using  
safety belt or LATCH  
or occupant using  
safety belt  
Configurations for Use of  
Child Restraints  
A. Child restraint  
using LATCH  
B. Child restraint or  
occupant using  
safety belt  
1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. Child restraint or  
occupant using  
safety belt  
Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
Children (LATCH)  
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving  
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation  
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses  
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child  
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.  
A. Child restraint or  
occupant using  
safety belt  
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is  
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s  
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the  
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the  
instructions in this manual. When installing a child  
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the  
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure  
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be  
installed using only the top tether and anchor.  
B. Child restraint  
using LATCH  
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you  
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.  
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you  
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and  
its attachments. The following explains how to attach a  
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.  
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have  
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors  
and attachments.  
1-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lower Anchors  
Top Tether Anchor  
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.  
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating  
position that will accommodate a child restraint with  
lower attachments (B).  
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint  
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the  
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child  
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle  
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation  
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.  
1-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a  
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)  
to secure the top tether to the anchor.  
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor  
Locations  
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed  
for use with or without the top tether being attached.  
Others require the top tether always to be attached.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing  
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether  
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions  
for your child restraint.  
i (Top Tether Anchor):  
Seating positions with  
top tether anchors.  
j (Lower Anchor):  
Seating positions with  
two lower anchors.  
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can  
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.  
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not  
a kit is available.  
Rear Seat  
1-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To assist you in locating the lower anchors,  
each rear anchor position has a label, near the  
crease between the seatback and the seat cushion,  
showing where the anchors are located.  
The top tether anchors are located behind the rear seat  
on the filler panel.  
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a  
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that  
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that  
come with the child restraint say that the top tether  
must be attached.  
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.  
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-38 for  
additional information.  
1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for  
the LATCH System  
{CAUTION:  
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in  
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child  
restraint. Attaching more than one child  
restraint to a single anchor could cause the  
anchor or attachment to come loose or even  
break during a crash. A child or others could  
be injured if this happens. To help prevent  
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,  
attach only one child restraint per anchor.  
{CAUTION:  
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to  
anchors, the restraint will not be able to protect  
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be  
seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a  
LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed  
using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety  
belts to secure the restraint, following the  
instructions that came with that restraint, and  
also the instructions in this manual.  
{CAUTION:  
Children can be seriously injured or strangled  
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their  
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.  
Secure any unused safety belts behind the  
child restraint so children cannot reach them.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You cannot secure three child restraints using the  
LATCH anchors in the rear seat at the same time,  
but you can install two of them. If you want to do this,  
install one LATCH child restraint in the passenger-side  
position, and install the other one either in the  
driver-side position or in the center position. Refer to  
the following illustration to learn which anchors to use.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the  
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has  
one, after the child restraint has been installed.  
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child  
restraint manufacturer.  
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH  
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt  
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make  
sure when securing unused safety belts behind  
the child restraint that there is no contact between  
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and  
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.  
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts  
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the  
seat. When removing the child restraint, always  
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,  
stowed position before folding the rear seat.  
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors  
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors  
If you need to secure more than one child restraint  
in the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint  
on page 1-38. Depending on where you place the  
child restraint, you may not be able to access certain  
safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional  
passengers or child restraints.  
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors  
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper  
anchor location.  
1-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This system is designed to make installation of child  
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use  
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s  
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the  
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle  
anchor to secure a top tether.  
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether  
according to the child restraint instructions  
and the following instructions:  
If the position you are  
using does not have a  
headrest or head restraint  
and you are using a  
single tether, route the  
tether over the seatback.  
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the  
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have  
lower attachments or the desired seating position  
does not have lower anchors, secure the child  
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.  
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer  
instructions and the instructions in this manual.  
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired  
seating position.  
If the position you are  
using does not have a  
headrest or head restraint  
and you are using a  
dual tether, route the  
tether over the seatback.  
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments  
on the child restraint to the lower anchors.  
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends  
that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten  
the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.  
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the  
following steps:  
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.  
2.2. If the position you are using has an  
adjustable headrest or head restraint, raise it.  
See Head Restraints on page 1-7.  
1-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the position you are using  
has an adjustable headrest  
or head restraint and you  
are using a single tether,  
route the tether under the  
headrest or head restraint  
and in between the  
headrest or head restraint  
on page 1-7.  
Securing a Child Restraint in a  
Rear Seat Position  
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating  
position, study the instructions that came with your child  
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.  
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see  
on page 1-40 for how to install your child restraint using  
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety  
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors  
top tether anchor locations.  
If the position you are using  
has an adjustable headrest  
or head restraint and you  
are using a dual tether  
route the tether under the  
headrest or head restraint  
and in between the  
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a  
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires  
that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions  
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap  
must be anchored.  
headrest or head restraint  
on page 1-7.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child  
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be  
attached.  
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,  
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child  
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions  
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the  
child restraint when and as the instructions say.  
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
1-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the  
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint  
on page 1-38.  
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder  
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or  
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions  
will show you how.  
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out  
of the retractor to set the lock.  
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
Make sure the release button is positioned so you  
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly  
if necessary.  
1-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the  
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding  
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors  
for more information.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s  
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top  
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.  
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,  
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten  
the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder  
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a  
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it  
helpful to use your knee to push down on the  
child restraint as you tighten the belt.  
1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing a Child Restraint in the  
Right Front Seat Position  
{CAUTION:  
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place  
to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where  
to Put the Restraint on page 1-38.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front  
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because  
the back of the rear-facing child restraint  
would be very close to the inflating airbag.  
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing  
system which is designed to turn off the right front  
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side  
impact airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger  
Status Indicator on page 3-30 for more information  
on this, including important safety information.  
Even though the passenger sensing system is  
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s  
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing  
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and  
no one can guarantee that an airbag will not  
deploy under some unusual circumstance,  
even though it is turned off. We recommend  
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in  
a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.  
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the  
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint  
in the right front seat, always move the front  
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is  
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63  
for additional information.  
1-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see  
on page 1-40 for how to install your child restraint using  
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety  
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors  
top tether anchor locations.  
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the  
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions  
that came with the child restraint.  
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before  
securing the forward-facing child restraint.  
When the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag  
and seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off  
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator  
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.  
page 3-30.  
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top  
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the  
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come  
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be  
anchored.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child  
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be  
attached.  
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder  
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or  
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions  
will show you how.  
1-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out  
of the retractor to set the lock.  
Make sure the release button is positioned so you  
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly  
if necessary.  
1-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child  
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.  
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting  
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make  
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the  
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,  
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the  
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child  
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.  
If this happens, adjust the head restraint.  
Remove any additional material from the seat such  
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or  
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the  
child restraint.  
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,  
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the  
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder  
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a  
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful  
to use your knee to push down on the child  
restraint as you tighten the belt.  
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the  
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle  
and check with your dealer/retailer.  
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s  
safety belt and let it go back all the way.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger  
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on  
when the vehicle is started.  
1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear  
along the headliner or trim.  
Airbag System  
Your vehicle has the following airbags:  
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection  
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags  
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury  
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must  
inflate very quickly to do their job.  
A frontal airbag for the driver.  
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.  
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.  
Here are the most important things to know about the  
airbag system:  
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right  
front passenger.  
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger  
seated directly behind the driver.  
{CAUTION:  
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and  
the passenger seated directly behind the right  
front passenger.  
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash  
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even  
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt  
during a crash helps reduce your chance of  
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected  
from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints”  
to the safety belts. All airbags are designed to  
work with safety belts, but do not replace them.  
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word  
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label  
near the deployment opening.  
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on  
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and  
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.  
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word  
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback  
closest to the door.  
1-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in  
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal  
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in  
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.  
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than  
the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against,  
or very close to, any airbag when it inflates  
can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit  
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you  
would be if you were sitting on the edge of your  
seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help keep  
you in position before and during a crash.  
Always wear your safety belt, even with airbags.  
The driver should sit as far back as possible  
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.  
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and roof-rail  
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to  
severe crashes where something hits the side  
of your vehicle. They are not designed to  
inflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.  
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety  
belt properly — whether or not there is an  
airbag for that person.  
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against  
the door or side windows in seating positions  
with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or  
roof-rail airbags.  
1-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where Are the Airbags?  
{CAUTION:  
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the  
best protection for adults, but not for young  
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s  
safety belt system nor its airbag system is  
designed for them. Young children and infants  
need the protection that a child restraint  
system can provide. Always secure children  
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see  
Young Children on page 1-32.  
There is an airbag  
readiness light on  
the instrument panel  
cluster, which shows  
the airbag symbol.  
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the  
steering wheel.  
The system checks the airbag electrical system for  
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical  
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29  
for more information.  
1-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar  
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the  
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.  
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and  
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks  
closest to the door.  
1-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
If something is between an occupant and an  
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly  
or it might force the object into that person  
causing severe injury or even death. The  
path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.  
Do not put anything between an occupant and  
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything  
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any  
other airbag covering.  
Do not use seat accessories that block the  
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact  
airbag.  
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar  
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never  
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by  
routing the rope or tie down through any door  
or window opening. If you do, the path of an  
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.  
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,  
and second row outboard passengers are in the  
ceiling above the side windows.  
1-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.  
For example:  
When Should an Airbag Inflate?  
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate  
to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce  
the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s  
or right front passenger’s head and chest. However,  
they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds  
a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment  
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash  
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and  
help restrain the occupants.  
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags  
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the  
vehicle hits a moving object.  
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than  
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.  
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed  
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).  
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy  
is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling.  
It depends largely on what you hit, the direction  
of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle  
slows down.  
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed  
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.  
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.  
1-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle  
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.  
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are  
not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal  
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side  
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the  
vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intended  
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.  
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.  
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to  
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal  
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish  
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe  
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage  
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.  
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.  
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an  
airbag should have inflated simply because of the  
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs  
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by  
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how  
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted  
side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is  
determined by the location and severity of the  
side impact.  
Your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and  
roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-54.  
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags  
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side  
crashes. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail  
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the  
system’s designed threshold level. The threshold  
level can vary with specific vehicle design.  
1-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?  
How Does an Airbag Restrain?  
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends  
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from  
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag  
causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.  
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are  
all part of the airbag module.  
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,  
even belted occupants can contact the steering  
wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe  
side collisions, even belted occupants can contact  
the inside of the vehicle.  
Airbags supplement the protection provided by  
safety belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the  
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,  
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted  
side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force  
of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s  
upper body.  
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the  
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles  
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are  
airbag modules in the side of the front seatbacks  
closest to the door. For vehicles with roof-rail  
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling  
of the vehicle, near the side windows that have  
occupant seating positions.  
But airbags would not help in many types of  
collisions, primarily because the occupant’s motion  
is not toward those airbags. See When Should an  
Airbag Inflate? on page 1-59 for more information.  
Airbags should never be regarded as anything  
more than a supplement to safety belts.  
1-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
What Will You See After an  
Airbag Inflates?  
{CAUTION:  
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact  
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that  
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.  
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated  
for some time after they deploy. Some components  
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.  
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes  
an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-61.  
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust  
in the air. This dust could cause breathing  
problems for people with a history of asthma  
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,  
everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon  
as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing  
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle  
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by  
opening a window or a door. If you experience  
breathing problems following an airbag  
deployment, you should seek medical  
attention.  
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with  
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may  
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in  
the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent  
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being  
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people  
from leaving the vehicle.  
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically  
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn  
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.  
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,  
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the  
controls for those features.  
1-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,  
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.  
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from  
the right front passenger airbag.  
Passenger Sensing System  
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for  
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger  
airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument  
panel when you start your vehicle.  
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an  
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for  
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag  
system will not be there to help protect you in  
another crash. A new system will include airbag  
modules and possibly other parts. The service  
manual for your vehicle covers the need to  
replace other parts.  
Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic  
module which records information after a crash.  
United States  
Canada  
page 7-16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-17.  
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,  
will be visible during the system check. If you are  
using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,  
if equipped, you may not see the system check.  
When the system check is complete, either the word  
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol  
for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status  
Indicator on page 3-30.  
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag  
systems. Improper service can mean that an  
airbag system will not work properly. See your  
dealer/retailer for service.  
1-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right  
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side  
impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s  
airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system.  
{CAUTION:  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front  
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because  
the back of the rear-facing child restraint  
would be very close to the inflating airbag.  
The passenger sensing system works with sensors  
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat.  
The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a  
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front  
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side  
impact airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.  
Even though the passenger sensing system is  
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s  
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag  
(if equipped) if the system detects a rear-facing  
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and  
no one can guarantee that an airbag will not  
deploy under some unusual circumstance,  
even though it is turned off. We recommend  
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in  
a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.  
Accident statistics show that children are safer if  
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.  
We recommend that children be secured in a rear  
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing  
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child  
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,  
who are large enough, using safety belts.  
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the  
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in  
the right front seat, always move the front  
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is  
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.  
1-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off  
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and  
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child  
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint  
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions  
Front Seat Position on page 1-50.  
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.  
The system determines that an infant is present  
in a rear-facing infant seat.  
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the  
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that  
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint  
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline  
the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if  
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped  
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust  
the head restraint. See Head Restraints on page 1-7.  
The system determines that a small child is  
present in a child restraint.  
The system determines that a small child is  
present in a booster seat.  
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off  
of the seat for a period of time.  
Remove any additional material from the seat such as  
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat  
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child  
restraint.  
The right front passenger seat is occupied by a  
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown  
child restraints.  
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag  
system or the passenger sensing system.  
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child  
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and check  
with your dealer/retailer.  
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the  
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted  
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and  
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off. See  
The passenger sensing system is designed to  
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal  
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime  
the system senses that a person of adult size is  
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.  
1-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the  
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and  
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are active.  
For some children who have outgrown child restraints  
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system  
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal  
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending  
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.  
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child  
restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether  
or not there is an airbag for that person.  
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front  
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be  
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.  
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any  
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,  
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers  
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully  
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered  
on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably  
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person  
remain in this position for two to three minutes.  
This will allow the system to detect that person and  
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag  
and seat-mounted side impact airbag.  
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on  
the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which  
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the  
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and  
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information  
about the importance of proper restraint use.  
1-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket  
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat  
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect  
how well the passenger sensing system operates.  
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other  
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has  
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding  
page 1-68 for more information about modifications  
that can affect how the system operates.  
{CAUTION:  
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument  
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,  
it means that something may be wrong with  
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have  
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an  
adult-size person sitting in the right front  
passenger’s seat may not have the protection  
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light  
on page 3-29 for more on this, including  
important safety information.  
{CAUTION:  
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s  
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion  
and seatback may interfere with the proper  
operation of the passenger sensing system.  
1-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped  
Vehicle  
Adding Equipment to Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle  
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.  
There are parts of the airbag system in several  
places around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and  
the service manual have information about servicing  
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase  
a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering  
Information on page 7-15.  
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change  
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags  
from working properly?  
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s  
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side  
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from  
working properly. Changing or moving any parts  
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing  
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument  
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner  
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front  
sensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring  
can affect the operation of the airbag system.  
{CAUTION:  
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is  
turned off and the battery is disconnected,  
an airbag can still inflate during improper  
service. You can be injured if you are close  
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow  
connectors. They are probably part of the  
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper  
service procedures, and make sure the person  
performing work for you is qualified to do so.  
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger  
sensing system for the right front passenger’s  
position, which includes sensors that are part  
of the passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing  
system may not operate properly if the original  
seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers,  
upholstery or trim, or with GM covers,  
upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle.  
1-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater  
or a comfort enhancing pad or device, installed  
under or on top of the seat fabric, could also  
interfere with the operation of the passenger  
sensing system. This could either prevent proper  
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent  
the passenger sensing system from properly  
turning off the passenger airbag(s). See  
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my  
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether  
this will affect my airbag system?  
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.  
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer  
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer  
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See  
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service  
manual have information about the location of  
the airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic module  
and airbag wiring.  
If you have any questions about this, you should  
contact Customer Assistance before you modify  
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses  
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of  
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this  
on page 7-2.  
1-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Airbags  
Restraint System Check  
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled  
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag  
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light  
on page 3-29 for more information.  
Checking the Restraint Systems  
Safety Belts  
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,  
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.  
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there  
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have  
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.  
For the location of the airbag modules, see  
See your dealer/retailer for service.  
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder  
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors  
and anchorages are working properly.  
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system  
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety  
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn  
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.  
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt  
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.  
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.  
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-28 for more  
information.  
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of  
Safety Belts on page 5-79.  
1-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or  
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?  
Replacing Restraint System Parts  
After a Crash  
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.  
But the belt assemblies that were used during any  
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your  
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies  
inspected or replaced.  
{CAUTION:  
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was  
being used during a crash, you may need new  
LATCH system parts.  
A crash can damage the restraint systems  
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system  
may not properly protect the person using it,  
resulting in serious injury or even death in  
a crash. To help make sure your restraint  
systems are working properly after a crash,  
have them inspected and any necessary  
replacements made as soon as possible.  
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the  
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being  
used at the time of the crash.  
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag  
system parts. See the part on the airbag system  
earlier in this section.  
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your  
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness  
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you  
are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29.  
1-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
1-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2  
Features and Controls  
PASS-Key® III+ ............................................2-17  
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ..............................2-18  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keys  
{CAUTION:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition  
key is dangerous for many reasons, children  
or others could be badly injured or even killed.  
They could operate the power windows or  
other controls or even make the vehicle move.  
The windows will function with the keys in the  
ignition and they could be seriously injured  
or killed if caught in the path of a closing  
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle  
with children.  
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.  
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer  
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.  
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.  
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,  
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.  
Be sure you have spare keys.  
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside  
on page 7-7.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System  
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is  
normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter does not  
work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle  
for the transmitter to work, try this:  
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject  
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules  
and with Industry Canada.  
Check the distance. You may be too far from your  
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during  
rainy or snowy weather.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be  
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or  
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Check to determine if battery replacement is  
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this  
section.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer  
or a qualified technician for service.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System Operation  
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked,  
and the trunk can be opened from about 3 feet (1 m)  
up to 197 feet (60 m) away with the Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) transmitter.  
There are other conditions which can affect the  
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3.  
Q (Lock): Press Qto lock all the doors. The interior  
lamps will turn off after all of the doors are closed.  
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),  
the remote lock feedback can be programmed to have  
the horn chirp and/or the turn signals flash when the  
RKE transmitter is used to lock the vehicle’s doors. See  
“LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle  
Personalization on page 3-51 for more information.  
Pressing Qmay also arm the content theft-deterrent  
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-15.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
K (Unlock): Press K to unlock the driver’s door.  
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and  
If K is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining  
doors unlock. The interior lamps turn on and stay  
on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.  
If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback  
can be programmed to have the horn chirp and/or  
the turn signals flash when the RKE transmitter is used  
to unlock the vehicle’s doors. See “UNLOCK HORN”  
and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle Personalization  
on page 3-51 for more information.  
hold Vfor about one second to open the trunk.  
The trunk can be opened with the transmitter when  
the vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) or when  
the ignition is off.  
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release  
Lto locate your vehicle. The horn sounds three times  
and the headlamps and turn signals flash three times.  
Press and hold Lfor about three seconds to initiate the  
panic alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps and  
turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press Lagain  
to cancel the panic alarm.  
If enabled through the DIC, and it is dark enough  
outside, the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps, parking  
lamps, and back-up lamps will turn on each time K on  
the transmitter is pressed. These exterior lamps will  
stay on for 20 seconds, or until a door is opened.  
See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle  
Personalization on page 3-51 for additional information.  
Matching Transmitter(s) to  
Your Vehicle  
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another  
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is  
lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through  
your retailer. All transmitters need to be re-coded to  
match the new transmitter. The lost transmitter will no  
longer work after the new transmitters are re-coded.  
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters  
matched to it.  
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter will disarm  
the content theft-deterrent system. See Content  
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-15.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery Replacement  
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT (Battery)  
LOW message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB  
BATT (Battery) LOW” under DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-46 for additional information.  
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to  
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body  
transferred to these surfaces may damage the  
transmitter.  
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:  
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,  
thin object inserted into the notch on the side.  
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.  
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.  
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.  
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.  
Doors and Locks  
From the outside, use your key or Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one. Turn the  
key counterclockwise to unlock the door.  
Door Locks  
From the inside, lock and unlock the door by moving the  
manual lock knob down and up, or by using the power  
door lock switches.  
{CAUTION:  
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.  
Power Door Locks  
Passengers, especially children, can easily  
open the doors and fall out of a moving  
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle  
will not open it. You increase the chance  
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a  
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear  
safety belts properly and lock the doors  
whenever you drive.  
Young children who get into unlocked  
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child  
can be overcome by extreme heat and can  
suffer permanent injuries or even death  
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle  
whenever you leave it.  
The power door lock switches are located on the  
driver’s and front passenger’s door.  
Press the outboard side of the switch to unlock all doors.  
Press the inboard side of the switch to lock all doors.  
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.  
Rear seat passengers must use the manual lock  
knob on their doors.  
Outsiders can easily enter through an  
unlocked door when you slow down or  
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can  
help prevent this from happening.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If a door is opened before the five seconds has elapsed,  
the doors do not lock until five seconds after all doors  
are closed.  
Door Ajar Reminder  
If one of the doors is not fully closed while the ignition  
is on and the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P)  
or NEUTRAL (N) the following will occur:  
If the power door lock switch or the transmitter lock  
button is pressed twice when leaving the vehicle, the  
doors lock immediately.  
A chime will sound.  
If the power door unlock switch or the transmitter unlock  
button is pressed, the doors unlock immediately and  
do not lock automatically after the doors are closed.  
The DOOR AJAR message will display through  
the Driver Information Center (DIC) until the  
door is closed. See DIC Warnings and Messages  
on page 3-46.  
This feature is turned on at the factory but may be  
turned off through the Driver Information Center (DIC).  
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-51.  
Delayed Locking  
This feature allows the driver to delay the locking of the  
vehicle. It will not operate with the key in the ignition.  
See Lockout Protection on page 2-10.  
Programmable Automatic  
Door Locks  
Press the driver’s power door lock switch or the  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock button  
once. With the key removed from the ignition and  
the driver’s door open, the following occurs:  
Your vehicle is programmed at the factory to lock all  
doors automatically when the following are met:  
All doors are closed.  
The ignition is on.  
Three chimes sound to signal the delay.  
The shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).  
This feature cannot be disabled.  
All doors will lock and the turn signals flash once  
five seconds after the last door has been closed.  
The horn chirps if the horn chirp feature is enabled.  
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-51.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the shift lever is moved back to PARK (P),  
all doors will unlock.  
To assist you in finding the lock, your vehicle will have  
one of the following:  
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are  
locked, have that person use the manual lock knob  
or power door unlock switch.  
The power door unlock function can be programmed  
through prompts displayed on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC). These prompts allow you to choose unlock  
settings. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-51.  
Rear Door Security Locks  
Your vehicle has rear door security locks, that prevent  
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.  
The rear door security locks are located on the inside  
edge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors  
to access them.  
To use these locks, do the following:  
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it  
so the slot is in the horizontal position.  
2. Close the door.  
3. Do the same for the other rear door.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When you want to open a rear door when the security  
lock is on, do the following:  
Trunk  
To open the trunk from the outside, press the trunk  
release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter.  
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry  
transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power door  
lock switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.  
2. Open the door from the outside.  
{CAUTION:  
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:  
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.  
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid  
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can  
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or  
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and  
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid  
open or if electrical wiring or other cable  
connections must pass through the seal  
between the body and the trunk lid:  
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it  
so the slot is in the vertical position.  
3. Do the same for the other rear door.  
Lockout Protection  
This feature prevents the driver’s door from being  
locked using the power door locks, if the key is left in  
the ignition and a door is open.  
Make sure all other windows are shut.  
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling  
system to its highest speed and select the  
control setting that will force outside air  
into your vehicle. See Climate Control  
System.  
Press the power door lock switch to lock all the doors  
and then unlock the driver’s door.  
Press and hold the power door lock switch for more  
than three seconds to override this feature.  
If you have air outlets on or under the  
instrument panel, open them all the way.  
If the key is removed from the ignition, or if the manual  
door lock or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter is used, the key could still be locked inside  
the vehicle. Always remember to take the key with you.  
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Trunk Release  
Emergency Trunk Release Handle  
Press the button located  
on the driver’s door near  
the map pocket to open  
the trunk.  
The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle is  
in PARK (P).  
To close the trunk use the pullstrap located on the  
trunk lid.  
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release  
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing  
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.  
The emergency trunk release handle is only  
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,  
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.  
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release  
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch.  
This handle glows following exposure to light. Pull the  
release handle up to open the trunk from the inside.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows  
{CAUTION:  
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a  
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.  
They can be overcome by the extreme heat  
and suffer permanent injuries or even death  
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a  
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,  
especially with the windows closed in warm  
or hot weather.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Express-Up Window  
Power Windows  
On windows with this feature, pull the switch up to the  
second position and release the switch to activate  
the express-up feature. To stop the window as it is  
raising, pull up or press down briefly on the switch again.  
The power window  
switches are located  
on the armrest on the  
driver’s door. In addition,  
each passenger door  
has a switch for its  
own window.  
Programming the Power Windows  
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,  
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to  
reprogram the driver’s power window for the express-up  
feature to work. Replace or recharge the vehicle’s  
battery before reprogramming.  
To program the driver’s window, follow these steps:  
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,  
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is  
active, close all doors.  
Express-Down Window  
The driver’s window has an express-down feature.  
This switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front of  
the switch part way, and the driver’s window opens  
a small amount. If the front of the switch is pressed  
all the way down and released, the window goes  
all the way down automatically.  
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the  
window is fully open.  
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window  
is fully closed.  
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately  
two seconds after the window is completely  
closed.  
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front  
of the switch momentarily. To raise the window,  
pull and hold the front of the switch.  
The window is now reprogrammed.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be  
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window  
switch all the way up to the second position. The window  
rises for as long as the switch is held. Once the  
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.  
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature  
If any object is in the path of the window when the  
express-up is active, the window stops at the obstruction  
and auto-reverse to a preset factory position. Weather  
conditions such as severe icing may also cause the  
window to auto-reverse. The window returns to normal  
operation once the obstruction or condition is removed.  
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in  
its path. Use care when using the override mode.  
Window Lockout  
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override  
The driver’s power window controls also include a  
lockout button.  
{CAUTION:  
o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout button to  
stop the rear passengers from using their window  
switches. The driver and front passenger can still  
operate all the windows with the lock on. When the  
red part of the switch is visible you have returned  
to normal window operation.  
If express override is activated, the window  
will not reverse automatically. You or others  
could be injured and the window could be  
damaged. Before you use express override,  
make sure that all people and obstructions  
are clear of the window path.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sun Visors  
Content Theft-Deterrent  
To block out glare, swing down the visors. They can  
also be removed from the center mount and swung to  
the side, to block out glare from the side. The visors  
also have extenders that can be pulled out.  
Your vehicle may have  
a content theft-deterrent  
alarm system.  
Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors  
located on the passenger and driver side visors.  
A light turns on when the cover is lifted.  
Theft-Deterrent Systems  
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.  
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent  
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make  
it impossible to steal.  
Arming the System  
With the ignition off, you can arm the system by  
pressing the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter  
lock button.  
The system will arm 30 seconds after all the doors are  
closed, or 60 seconds with any door open.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second  
time while all the doors are closed, the system will  
arm immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds  
if a door is open. When the open door is closed,  
the system will arm.  
Disarming the System  
To disarm the system, do one of the following:  
Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.  
Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.  
The security light, located on the instrument panel  
cluster, comes on to indicate that arming has been  
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light  
will flash once every three seconds.  
If you want to lock the vehicle without arming the  
content theft system, lock the vehicle with the manual  
lock knob on the doors or with the inside power  
door lock switches.  
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this  
means that a door is open.  
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will  
stop flashing.  
If the system is armed and the key is used to unlock  
the vehicle, the alarm will be activated.  
How the System Alarm is Activated  
If you do not want to arm the content theft system,  
lock the vehicle with the manual lock knob on the  
doors or with the inside power door lock switches.  
To activate the system if it is armed:  
Open the driver’s door or trunk. A ten second  
pre-alarm chirp will sound followed by a  
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.  
The alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash  
if any door is opened while armed.  
Open any other door. A full alarm of horn and  
lights will immediately sound for thirty seconds.  
Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remote start  
feature, it will activate the full alarm.  
When an alarm event has finished, the system will  
re-arm itself automatically.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PASS-Key® III+  
How to Turn Off the System Alarm  
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio  
frequency subject to Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.  
To turn off the system alarm:  
Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.  
The system will then re-arm itself.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.  
This will also disarm the system.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.  
This will also disarm the system.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
How to Detect a Tamper Condition  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
If you hear three chirps when the unlock or lock  
button is pressed on the RKE transmitter, it means  
that the content theft security system alarm was  
previously triggered.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in  
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PASS-Key® III+ Operation  
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized  
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.  
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.  
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears  
to be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time,  
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses on  
page 5-87. If the engine still does not start with the other  
key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does  
start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer  
who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new  
key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside  
on page 7-7.  
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to  
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement  
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.  
The following procedure is for programming additional  
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are  
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer  
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to  
have keys made and programmed to the system.  
The system is automatically armed when the key  
is removed from the ignition.  
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.  
The security light will come on if there is a problem  
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.  
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone  
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from  
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start  
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high  
number of electrical key codes.  
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not  
start and the security light on the instrument panel  
cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your  
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.  
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service  
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut  
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To program the new key:  
Starting and Operating  
Your Vehicle  
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.  
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition  
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,  
see your dealer/retailer for service.  
New Vehicle Break-In  
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to  
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.  
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate  
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run  
if you follow these guidelines:  
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to  
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of the  
original key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.  
Do not drive at any one constant speed,  
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).  
Do not make full-throttle starts. Do not exceed  
5,000 engine rpm. Avoid downshifting to  
brake or slow the vehicle.  
The security light will turn off once the key has  
been programmed.  
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are  
to be programmed.  
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles  
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake  
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops  
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on  
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if  
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,  
is not working properly and must be serviced by  
your dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by  
the PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.  
If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or damaged, see  
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service  
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.  
with new linings can mean premature wear and  
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in  
guideline every time you get new brake linings.  
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See  
Towing a Trailer on page 4-29 for the trailer  
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more  
information.  
Following break-in, engine speed and load can  
be gradually increased.  
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or  
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9 (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position from which  
the key can be removed. It also locks the ignition  
and transmission. A warning chime sounds if the driver’s  
door is opened while the ignition is off and the key is  
left in the ignition.  
Ignition Positions  
With the key in the ignition  
switch, you can turn it to  
four different positions.  
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things  
like the radio and windshield wipers while the engine  
is not running.  
R (ON/RUN): This position unlocks the ignition. It is  
also the position to where the key returns after you  
release the switch and the engine starts. The switch will  
stay in this position while the engine is running. But  
even while the engine is not running, you can use  
ON/RUN to operate the electrical accessories, and to  
display some instrument panel warning lights.  
In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the  
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake  
pedal must be applied.  
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the  
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine  
off. You might not be able to start your vehicle if the  
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.  
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the  
ignition switch could cause damage or break the  
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with  
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way.  
If none of this works, then your vehicle needs  
service.  
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the  
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch  
will return to the ON/RUN position for normal driving.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes  
after the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.  
Key In the Ignition  
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is  
an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave  
the key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime  
sounds, when the driver’s door is opened. Always  
remember to remove the key from the ignition and take  
it with you. This locks your ignition and transmission.  
Also, always remember to lock the doors.  
The power windows, heated seats, and sunroof will  
work until any door is opened.  
The radio continues to work until the driver’s door  
is opened.  
All these features operate when the key is in the  
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.  
The battery could be drained if the key is left in the  
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You might not be  
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for  
an extended period of time.  
Starting the Engine  
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop)  
The shift lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)  
for the vehicle to start. To restart when the vehicle  
is already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.  
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to  
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:  
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your  
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage  
the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your  
vehicle is stopped.  
Audio System  
Power Windows  
Sunroof (if equipped)  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,  
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or 18°C),  
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try  
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor  
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for  
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least  
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking  
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of  
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly  
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears  
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the  
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the  
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up  
and lubricates all moving parts.  
Starting Procedure  
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the  
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,  
let go of the key. The idle speed goes down as  
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine  
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and  
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up  
and lubricate all moving parts.  
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking  
System. This feature assists in starting the  
engine and protects components. If the key is  
turned to the START position, and then released  
when the engine begins cranking, the engine  
continues cranking for a few seconds or until the  
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and  
the key is held in START for many seconds,  
cranking stops after 15 seconds to prevent cranking  
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this  
system also prevents cranking if the engine is  
already running. Engine cranking can be stopped  
by turning the ignition switch to the  
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the  
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical  
parts or accessories, you could change the way the  
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,  
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your  
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting  
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s  
warranty.  
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.  
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of  
time, by returning the key to the START position  
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat  
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the  
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,  
to let the cranking motor cool down.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your vehicle has an automatic engine start/stop feature.  
After the engine is started and has reached operating  
temperature, the AUTO STOP feature may cause  
the engine to turn off when you apply the brakes and  
come to a complete stop. When you take your foot  
off the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal,  
the engine will start. The engine will continue to run  
until the next AUTO STOP.  
Automatic Engine Start/Stop  
{CAUTION:  
Exiting your vehicle, without first shifting into  
PARK (P), may cause the vehicle to move, you  
or others may be injured. Because your vehicle  
has the Automatic Engine Start/Stop feature,  
your vehicle’s engine might seem to be shut  
off, however, once the brake pedal is released,  
the engine could start up again.  
The AUTO STOP symbol on the tachometer signifies  
that the engine is in AUTO STOP mode. See Auto Stop  
Mode on page 3-42 for more information. When the  
vehicle is turned off, the tachometer will move to OFF.  
If the driver’s door is opened while in AUTO STOP  
mode, a chime will sound.  
Shift to PARK (P) and turn the ignition to OFF,  
before exiting the vehicle.  
To restart the engine during the AUTO STOP,  
release the brake pedal or press the accelerator  
pedal. The engine starts immediately. The vehicle  
continues to run until the next stop.  
There are several conditions which may prevent an  
AUTO STOP or cause an AUTO START.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Engine Will Remain Running When:  
The Engine Will Restart When:  
The brake pedal is released.  
The engine, transmission, or hybrid battery is  
not warmed up yet.  
The accelerator pedal is applied.  
The outside temperature is less than 5°F (15°C).  
When shifting out of DRIVE (D) to any other gear.  
While the A/C is in Normal Mode.  
If the Hybrid A/C button is selected, the duration  
of the AUTO STOP will depend on the outside  
temperature. This economy mode improves  
fuel economy by limiting the effects of the air  
conditioning. The warmer it is outside, the shorter  
the time before the engine is restarted to provide  
cabin cooling.  
A/C is in Hybrid Mode and the climate control system  
is working to cool the vehicle. See Automatic Climate  
Control System on page 3-19 for more information.  
Defrost is selected.  
The shift lever is in PARK (P), NEUTRAL (N),  
REVERSE (R), INTERMEDIATE (I) or LOW (L).  
The climate control system is turned from Off to  
Normal A/C or defrost See Automatic Climate  
Control System on page 3-19 for more information.  
The hybrid battery pack charge is low.  
The 12V vehicle battery charge is low, or loads  
are high.  
The engine is required to run for either heater or  
climate control performance. See “Air Conditioning  
Engine Start/Stop” under Automatic Climate Control  
System on page 3-19 for more information.  
The hood is not fully closed.  
The hybrid battery pack charge is low and requires  
recharging.  
Auto Stop time is greater than two minutes.  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Coolant Heater  
{CAUTION:  
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in  
cold weather conditions at or below 0°F (18°C)  
for easier starting and better fuel economy during  
engine warm-up. Plug in the coolant heater at least  
four hours before starting your vehicle. An internal  
thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which  
will prevent engine coolant heater operation at  
temperatures above 0° F (18° C).  
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet  
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the  
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat  
and cause a fire. You could be seriously  
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded  
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord  
will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong  
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.  
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater  
1. Turn off the engine.  
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The  
engine coolant heater cord is located near the air  
cleaner box on the passenger side of the engine  
on page 5-14 for more information on location.  
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and  
store the cord as it was before to keep it away  
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could  
be damaged.  
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged  
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,  
the kind of oil you have, and some other things.  
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that  
you contact your dealer/retailer in the area where you  
will be parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can  
give you the best advice for that particular area.  
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt  
AC outlet.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Transmission Operation  
{CAUTION:  
The shift lever is located on the console between  
the seats.  
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the  
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the  
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.  
There are several different  
positions for the automatic  
transmission.  
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is  
running unless you have to. If you have left the  
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.  
You or others could be injured. To be sure your  
vehicle will not move, even when you are on  
fairly level ground, always set your parking  
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).  
See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-29.  
PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels.  
It is the best position to use when you start the  
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.  
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before  
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic  
transmission shift lock control system. You have to  
fully apply the regular brakes first and then press the  
shift lever button before shifting from PARK (P) when  
the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out  
of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and  
push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) while  
maintaining brake application. Then press the shift  
lever button and move the shift lever into another gear.  
See Shifting Out of PARK (P) on page 2-31.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.  
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)  
with the engine running at high speed may  
damage the transmission. The repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine  
is not running at high speed when shifting your  
vehicle.  
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle  
is moving forward could damage the transmission.  
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.  
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is  
stopped.  
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving with  
the automatic transmission. It provides the best  
fuel economy for your vehicle. If you need more power  
for passing, and you are:  
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of  
snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission,  
Snow on page 4-21.  
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),  
push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.  
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not  
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are  
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use  
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.  
Going above 35 mph (55 km/h), push the  
accelerator all the way down.  
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions  
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of  
Control on page 4-12.  
{CAUTION:  
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is  
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless  
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your  
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could  
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not  
shift into a drive gear while your engine is  
running at high speed.  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for  
normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed  
without using your brakes for slight downgrades  
where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due  
to steepness of grade. If constant upshifting or  
downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills,  
this position can be used to prevent repetitive types of  
shifts. You might choose INTERMEDIATE (I) instead  
of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding roads,  
so that there is less shifting between gears.  
Parking Brake  
To set the parking brake,  
push down the parking  
brake pedal with your  
left foot. If the ignition  
is on, the brake system  
warning light will come on.  
page 3-32.  
The engine will not Auto Stop when the shifter is in  
INTERMEDIATE (I). See Starting the Engine (Automatic  
Engine Start/Stop) on page 2-21  
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed more  
than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actually using the  
brakes. Use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or  
mud. If the shift lever is put in LOW (L), the transmission  
will not shift into LOW (L) until the vehicle is going  
slowly enough.  
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake  
pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily  
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you  
feel the pedal release. If the parking brake is not  
released when you begin to drive, the brake system  
warning light will be on and a chime will sound warning  
you that the parking brake is still on.  
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle  
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator  
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will  
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,  
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,  
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will also appear  
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) to remind you  
to release the parking brake. See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-46.  
Shifting Into PARK (P)  
{CAUTION:  
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can  
overheat the brake system and cause premature  
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure  
that the parking brake is fully released and the  
brake warning light is off before driving.  
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle  
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with  
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can  
roll. If you have left the engine running, the  
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others  
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will  
not move, even when you are on fairly level  
ground, use the steps that follow.  
Regenerative Braking  
Regenerative braking takes some of the energy from  
the moving vehicle and turns it back into electrical  
energy. This energy is then stored back into the  
vehicle’s hybrid battery system, contributing to  
increased fuel efficiency.  
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and  
set the parking brake.  
The system works whenever you take your foot off  
the accelerator pedal while your vehicle is moving  
in a forward gear. This causes your vehicle to  
slow down slightly faster. It may feel like the brake  
pedal is being pressed, even when it is not.  
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the  
button on the shift lever while pushing the shift  
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.  
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF/LOCK.  
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can  
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your  
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Leaving Your Vehicle With the  
Engine Running  
Torque Lock  
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the  
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the  
vehicle can put too much force on the parking pawl  
in the transmission. It could be difficult to pull the shift  
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”  
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and  
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the  
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P)  
on page 2-29.  
{CAUTION:  
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with  
the engine running. Your vehicle could move  
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in  
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.  
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine  
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.  
You or others could be injured. Do not leave  
your vehicle with the engine running.  
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out  
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.  
If torque lock does occur, you might need to have  
another vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill to take  
some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the  
transmission, this should let you pull the shift lever out  
of PARK (P).  
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running,  
be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the parking brake  
is firmly set before leaving it. After moving the shift lever  
into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then,  
see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)  
without first pushing the shift lever button.  
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully  
locked in PARK (P).  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):  
1. Fully release the shift lever button.  
Shifting Out of PARK (P)  
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock  
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:  
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the  
shift lever button again.  
Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift  
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button  
fully released, and  
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.  
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),  
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing  
service.  
Prevent movement of the shift lever out of  
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or  
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal  
is applied.  
Parking Over Things That Burn  
The shift lock release is always functional except in the  
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)  
battery.  
{CAUTION:  
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery  
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the  
battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-36 for more  
information.  
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust  
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not  
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other  
things that can burn.  
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:  
1. Apply the brake pedal.  
2. Then press the shift lever button.  
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Exhaust  
Running the Vehicle While Parked  
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you  
ever have to, here are some things to know.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas  
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or  
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.  
There is something about your vehicle that can  
make it move suddenly, and you or others can  
be seriously injured. This can happen if the  
vehicle is in the Auto Stop mode, and the shift  
lever is in DRIVE (D). Because your vehicle has  
the Automatic Engine Start/Stop feature, your  
vehicle’s engine might seem to be shut off  
when you come to a complete stop. However,  
if you then start to exit the vehicle, as soon as  
you take your foot off the brake pedal, the  
engine will start again and the vehicle can  
move forward. If you are going to exit your  
vehicle, first shift to PARK (P) and turn the  
ignition to LOCK/OFF. Then exit.  
You might have exhaust coming in if:  
The exhaust system sounds strange or  
different.  
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.  
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.  
Your vehicle was damaged when driving  
over high points on the road or over road  
debris.  
Repairs were not done correctly.  
Your vehicle or the exhaust system has  
been modified improperly.  
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your  
vehicle:  
Drive it only with all the windows down to  
blow out any CO; and  
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Idling the engine with the climate control  
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into  
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under  
Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.  
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle  
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with  
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can  
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine  
is running unless you have to. If you have  
left the engine running, the vehicle can move  
suddenly. You or others could be injured.  
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even  
when you are on fairly level ground, always  
set the parking brake and move the shift lever  
to PARK (P).  
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly  
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if  
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.  
One place this can happen is a garage.  
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.  
NEVER park in a garage with the engine  
running.  
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.  
See Winter Driving on page 4-17.  
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not  
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-29.  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Mirror  
Mirrors  
While cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar  
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray  
glass cleaner directly on the mirror housing.  
Manual Rearview Mirror  
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,  
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your  
vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or  
down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows  
you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps  
behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use  
and pull it for nighttime use.  
Outside Power Mirrors  
The controls for the  
outside power mirrors  
are located on the inside  
of the vehicle near the  
driver’s side mirror.  
Manual Rearview Mirror with  
OnStar®  
While you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,  
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your  
vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or  
down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows  
you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps  
behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use  
and pull it for nighttime use.  
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom  
of the mirror face. See your dealer/retailer for more  
information on the system and how to subscribe  
to OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-35 for  
more information about the services OnStar® provides.  
Use the selector switch located above the four-way  
control panel to choose either the left or right outside  
mirror. Then press the control pad to move the selected  
mirror in the desired direction.  
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your  
vehicle and the area beside and behind your vehicle.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If your airbags deploy, the system is designed to  
make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors  
who can request emergency services be sent to  
your location. If you lock your keys in the vehicle,  
call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send  
a signal to unlock your doors. If you need roadside  
assistance, press the OnStar button and they can  
contact Roadside Service for you.  
Heated Outside Mirrors  
If your vehicle has this feature, the surface of the  
outside mirrors will heat when the rear window defogger  
is activated. See “Rear Window Defogger” under  
more information.  
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror  
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the  
OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your  
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar.  
A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar  
Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s  
OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more  
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact  
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or  
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button  
to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,  
7 days a week.  
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s side  
mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you.  
This feature is controlled by the automatic dimming  
inside rearview mirror.  
OnStar® System  
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.  
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the  
services described below, or for a full description of  
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar  
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.  
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live  
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,  
security, information, and convenience services.  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics  
OnStar Services  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with  
30 complimentary minutes  
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan, or  
the Directions & Connections Plan is included for one  
year from the date of purchase. You can extend this plan  
beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions &  
Connections Plan. For more information, press the  
OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar  
services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle  
Location Assistance) may not be available until you  
register with OnStar.  
OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)  
Available Services included with  
Directions & Connections Plan  
All Safe and Sound Plan Services  
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar  
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)  
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan  
RideAssist  
Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment  
Information and Convenience Services  
Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)  
(If equipped)  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling  
Link to Emergency Services  
Roadside Assistance  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar  
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice  
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into  
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid  
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also  
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.  
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending  
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar  
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit  
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with  
an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or  
calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).  
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance  
AccidentAssist  
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert  
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar Virtual Advisor  
How OnStar Service Works  
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar  
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access  
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and  
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and  
giving a few simple voice commands, you can browse  
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s  
Guide for more information (Only available in the  
continental U.S.).  
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability  
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.  
This information is automatically sent to an OnStar  
Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press,  
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN  
system deploys. The vehicle information usually  
includes your GPS location and, in the event of a  
crash, additional information regarding the accident  
that your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction  
from which your vehicle was hit). When you use the  
Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling,  
your vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location  
so that we can provide you with location-based services.  
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls  
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can  
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.  
for more information.  
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in  
a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless  
service provider for service in that area. OnStar  
service also cannot work unless you are in a place  
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for  
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception  
when the service is needed, and technology that is  
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are  
available everywhere, particularly in remote or  
enclosed areas, or at all times.  
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button  
for a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR”  
to activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.  
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to  
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone  
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for  
more information.  
Location information about your vehicle is only available if  
the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available.  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system  
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar  
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar  
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing  
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.  
Some examples are damage to important parts of your  
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,  
weather or wireless phone network congestion.  
Cupholder(s)  
Your Responsibility  
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the  
OnStar advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons  
is red, this means that your system is not functioning  
properly and should be checked by your dealer/retailer.  
If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), your  
OnStar subscription has expired. You can always  
press the OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar  
equipment is active.  
There are two removable cupholders and additional  
storage areas located at the rear of the shift lever.  
To access, push the button and the cover will slide back  
automatically. To close, slide the cover forward and  
lock into place.  
Storage Areas  
Glove Box  
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Convenience Net  
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of  
the vehicle. Store small loads as far forward as possible.  
The net should not be used to store heavy loads.  
Sunroof  
On vehicles with a sunroof,  
the switch is located on  
the headliner between  
the map lamps.  
Pull down the door on the back of the center console  
to use the rear seat cupholders.  
Center Console Storage  
The sunroof will only operate while the ignition is in  
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained Accessory  
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory  
Power (RAP) on page 2-21.  
Your vehicle has a center console with two storage  
areas. To access the upper tray storage, lift the  
passenger side lever. To access the lower storage  
area, lift the driver side lever.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Press the back of the switch and release it to open  
the sunroof to the vent position. From the vent  
position, press and release the back of the switch  
to express-open the sunroof. To stop the sunroof  
from express opening, press the switch again. If the  
sunshade is closed, it will open automatically when  
the sunroof opens past the vented position.  
Sunshade  
The automatic sunshade  
control is located on the  
headliner, between  
the map lamp controls.  
A deflector will automatically raise when the sunroof  
is opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof  
is closed.  
To close the sunroof, press the front of the switch  
and hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof  
will stop if the switch is released. Close the sunshade  
by hand.  
The sunshade can be independently opened or closed  
while the panoramic sunroof is closed. To express-open  
or express-close the sunshade, press and release  
the control rearward or forward. The sunshade  
will retract to the full-open or closed position. To stop  
the movement of the sunshade, press the control  
a second time. To close the sunshade to a particular  
position, continue to press the control and release  
it when the desired position is reached.  
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed  
if the vehicle has an electrical failure.  
Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of the  
sliding glass panel, damage will occur and the  
sunroof may not open or close properly. Always  
close the glass panel before closing the sunshade.  
The sunshade cannot be opened or closed if the vehicle  
has an electrical failure.  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Panel Overview  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:  
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-24.  
Wheel on page 3-6.  
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn  
J. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.  
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel  
K. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).  
Cluster on page 3-26.  
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-72.  
D. Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever. See  
Washer on page 3-9.  
L. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.  
M. Automatic Climate Control System. See Automatic  
Climate Control System on page 3-19.  
E. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard  
N. Traction Control Button. See Traction Control  
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.  
System (TCS) on page 4-6.  
F. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. See Passenger  
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-30.  
on page 2-26.  
G. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument  
P. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-56.  
Panel Brightness on page 3-16.  
Q. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-38.  
H. Cruise Controls. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.  
Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hazard Warning Flashers  
Horn  
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police and  
others that you have a problem. The front and rear  
turn signal lamps will flash on and off.  
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering  
wheel pad to sound the horn.  
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel  
A tilt and telescope wheel lets you adjust the position of  
the steering wheel.  
The hazard warning  
flasher button is on the  
instrument panel.  
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal  
lamps flash on and off. Press again to turn the  
flashers completely off.  
The hazard warning flashers work even if the key is not  
in the ignition switch.  
Other Warning Devices  
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up  
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind  
your vehicle.  
T
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull down the  
lever. Then move the steering wheel up or down or  
backward or forward into a comfortable position.  
Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.  
Do not adjust the tilt and telescope lever while driving.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever  
Turn and Lane-Change Signals  
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and  
two downward (for left) positions. These positions  
let you signal a turn or a lane change.  
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.  
When the turn is finished, the lever returns automatically  
to the normal position.  
An arrow on the instrument  
panel cluster flashes in  
the direction of the turn or  
lane change.  
The lever on the left side of the steering column  
includes the following:  
G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and  
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until  
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete  
your lane change. The lever returns by itself when it  
is released.  
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.  
53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See  
Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8.  
If the arrows flash rapidly or do not go on at all as you  
signal a turn or lane change, a signal bulb could be  
burned out and other drivers will not see your turn signal.  
O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps  
on page 3-13.  
Replace burned out bulbs to help avoid an accident.  
Also, check the appropriate fuses. See Fuses on  
page 5-87.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
Windshield Wipers  
To change the headlamps from low beam to high  
beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever away  
from you.  
This light comes on in the  
instrument panel cluster if  
the high beam lamps  
are turned on while the  
ignition is in ON/RUN.  
Use this lever, located on the right side of the steering  
wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.  
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,  
pull the turn signal lever toward you.  
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the  
windshield wipers.  
Flash-to-Pass  
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to  
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.  
&(Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): Move the  
lever to this position for intermittent or speed sensitive  
operation. The amount of delay time varies between  
wiping cycles due to the delay setting selected or  
the speed of the vehicle. As vehicle speed is increased  
or decreased, the wiper interval will also increase or  
decrease.  
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward  
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then  
release the lever to turn them off.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.  
A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools. Clear  
away snow or ice to prevent an overload. If the motor  
gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the snow  
or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.  
x(Delay): While the lever is in the intermittent  
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with this  
symbol on it up or down to select a shorter or longer  
delay between wiping cycles. To the left of the  
adjust band are bars, increasing in size from bottom to  
top, that indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smaller  
bars mean the wipers movement is less frequent.  
Larger bars mean the movement is more frequent.  
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for  
more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps turn  
on automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after  
the wipers are turned off.  
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the  
first setting past intermittent, for steady wiping at low  
speed.  
Windshield Washer  
To wash the windshield, press the button at the end of  
the lever until the washers begin.  
1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the second  
setting past intermittent, for wiping at a high speed.  
8(Mist): Move the lever all the way down to  
this position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until  
the windshield wipers start; then let go. The windshield  
wipers stop after one wiping cycle. If additional  
wiping cycles are needed, hold the lever down longer.  
{CAUTION:  
In freezing weather, do not use your washer  
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the  
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,  
blocking your vision.  
Damaged wiper blades can prevent you from seeing well  
enough to drive safely. Clear ice and snow from the  
wiper blades before using them to prevent damage.  
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully  
loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become  
damaged, get new blades.  
When the button is released, the washers stop,  
but the wipers continue to wipe about three times  
or resume the previous speed.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Cruise Control  
Cruise Control  
Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)  
or more be maintained without keeping your foot on the  
accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise  
control does not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).  
{CAUTION:  
If you leave your cruise control on when you  
are not using cruise, you might hit a button  
and go into cruise when you do not want to.  
You could be startled and even lose control.  
Keep the cruise control switch off until you  
want to use cruise control.  
{CAUTION:  
Cruise control can be dangerous where you  
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do  
not use your cruise control on winding roads  
or in heavy traffic.  
The cruise control  
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery  
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire  
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and  
you could lose control. Do not use cruise  
control on slippery roads.  
buttons are located on  
the steering wheel.  
I(On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system  
on and off.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RES+ (Resume): Press RES+ to resume a set speed  
and to accelerate the speed.  
Resuming a Set Speed  
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed  
and then you apply the brakes. This disengages the  
cruise control. The cruise symbol in the instrument panel  
cluster also goes out indicating cruise is no longer  
engaged. To return to your previously set speed, you do  
not need to go through the set process again. Once  
at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, briefly  
press the RES+.  
SET(Set): Press SET– to set a speed and to  
decrease the speed.  
To set a speed do the following:  
1. Press Ito turn cruise control on. The indicator  
light on the button comes on.  
2. Get up to the desired speed.  
This takes the vehicle back up to the previously chosen  
speed and stays there.  
3. Press the SETand release it. The cruise symbol  
displays in the instrument panel cluster to show  
the system is engaged.  
Increasing Speed While Using  
Cruise Control  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.  
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.  
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control  
shuts off.  
If the cruise control system is already engaged,  
press the RES+. Hold it there until the desired  
speed is reached and then release the button.  
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction  
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the  
cruise control automatically disengages. See Traction  
Control System (TCS) on page 4-6. When road  
conditions allow, the cruise control can be used again.  
To increase the vehicle speed in very small  
amounts, briefly press the RES+ and then release  
it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about  
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reducing Speed While Using  
Cruise Control  
Using Cruise Control on Hills  
How well your cruise control works on hills depends  
upon the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the  
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to  
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s  
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or  
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle at a lower  
speed. When the brakes are applied this ends the cruise  
control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble  
and do not use cruise control on steep hills.  
If the cruise control system is already engaged:  
Push and hold the SETuntil the desired  
lower speed is reached, then release it.  
To slow down in very small amounts,  
briefly push the SET. Each time this  
is done, the vehicle goes about  
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.  
Ending Cruise Control  
Passing Another Vehicle While Using  
Cruise Control  
There are two ways to disengage the cruise control:  
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s  
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal,  
the vehicle slows down to the previously set  
cruise control speed.  
Step lightly on the brake pedal; when cruise control  
disengages, the cruise symbol in the instrument  
panel cluster goes out.  
Press the Ibutton, to turn off the cruise control  
system.  
Erasing Speed Memory  
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when  
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The exterior lamp control has the following  
four positions:  
Headlamps  
2(Headlamps): Turn the band to this position to turn  
on the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.  
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the band to this position to  
turn on the parking lamps and taillamps only.  
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Turn the band  
to this position to automatically turn on the Daytime  
Running Lamps during daytime, and the headlamps,  
parking lamps, and taillamps at night.  
P(Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turn  
on the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada,  
this position only works when a vehicle is in the  
PARK (P) position.  
The band on the lever on the outboard side of the  
steering column operates the exterior lamps.  
To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turn the  
switch to off/on. To turn them off, turn the switch to off/on  
again. This is a momentary control switch that springs  
back when released. The Automatic Headlamp System  
always turns on at the beginning of an ignition cycle.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Headlamps on Reminder  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for  
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL  
are helpful in many different driving conditions, but they  
can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn  
and before sunset. Fully functional DRL are required on  
all vehicles first sold in Canada. The vehicle has a light  
sensor on top of the instrument panel that controls the  
DRL. Make sure it is not covered, or the head lamps will  
be on when they are not needed.  
If you open the driver’s door and turn off the ignition  
while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a warning  
chime.  
Headlamps Off in PARK (P)  
This feature works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN  
position and it is dark outside. To turn the headlamps off  
when it is dark outside but keep other exterior lights on,  
turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp position.  
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come  
on at a reduced brightness when the following  
conditions are met:  
The ignition is on.  
To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps  
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamp control to  
the AUTO or headlamp position.  
This function does not work for vehicles first sold in  
Canada.  
The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.  
The exterior lamps control is in the parking lamps  
only position (This applies only to vehicles that  
are first sold in Canada).  
Delayed Headlamps  
The light sensor detects daytime light.  
The delayed headlamps feature keeps the headlamps  
on for 20 seconds after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF,  
then the headlamps automatically turn off.  
The parking brake is released or the vehicle is not  
in PARK.  
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker  
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights are not  
on unless you turn the exterior lamps control to the  
parking lamp position.  
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature  
while it is active turn the turn signal/multifunction  
lever up one position and then back to AUTO.  
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular  
headlamp system when they are needed.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic  
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once  
the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute  
for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL  
if it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument  
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure  
the instrument panel brightness control is in the full  
bright position. See “Instrument Panel Brightness  
Control” under Instrument Panel Brightness on  
page 3-16.  
Automatic Headlamp System  
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp  
system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness  
along with other lamps such as the taillamps,  
sidemarker, parking lamps, and the instrument panel  
lights. The radio lights will also be dim.  
Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument  
panel that controls the automatic headlamp system.  
Make sure it is not covered or the automatic headlamp  
system will be on when it is not needed.  
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system  
off, turn the ignition on and set the exterior light  
switch to the off/on position. For vehicles first sold in  
Canada, the transmission must stay in PARK (P) for  
this function.  
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime  
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic  
headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or  
bright overhead street lights does not affect the system.  
The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only  
be affected when the light sensor sees a change  
in lighting lasting longer than this delay.  
The regular headlamps should be used when needed.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Brightness  
Dome Lamp  
If the vehicle has a dome lamp with a switch,  
the following are the settings.  
The control for this  
feature is located on the  
instrument panel to the  
left of the steering wheel.  
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn  
the lamp off, even when a door is open.  
1 (Door): Move the lever to this position so that  
the lamp comes on when a door is opened.  
+(On): Move the lever to this position to turn  
the dome lamp on.  
Entry/Exit Lighting  
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to  
brighten or dim the lights.  
The lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door  
is opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds after  
all of the doors have been closed or when the ignition  
is turned to ON/RUN. They also come on when the  
unlock symbol button or the horn symbol is pressed on  
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system transmitter.  
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about  
20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition  
to provide light as you exit.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parade Dimming  
Battery Run-Down Protection  
Parade dimming is a separate lighting mode that comes  
on while the parking lamps are turned on during the  
day. It prevents the display lights and indicator  
lights from being dim, while the parking lamps are  
used during the day.  
Your vehicle has a battery run-down feature designed to  
protect the vehicle’s battery.  
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading lamps, or dome  
lamp) is left on when the ignition is turned off, the  
battery run-down protection system automatically shuts  
the lamp off after 20 minutes. This prevents draining  
of the battery.  
Overhead Console Reading Lamps  
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:  
Open any door.  
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the overhead  
console. These lamps come on when the doors are  
opened if the lamp switch is not in the OFF position.  
Press the side of each lamp to turn them on and  
off, while the doors are closed.  
Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter button.  
Press the power door lock switch.  
Press the remote trunk release.  
Overhead Ambient Lighting  
These lamps will automatically turn on and off as  
controlled by the light sensor located on top of the  
instrument panel.  
Turn the lamp that was left on to off and then  
to on again.  
Trunk Lamp  
The trunk lamp comes on when the trunk is opened and  
turns off when the trunk is closed.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your  
vehicle can damage it or keep other components  
from working as they should. The repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment  
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.  
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding  
electrical equipment.  
Accessory Power Outlet(s)  
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect  
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular  
telephone or CB radio.  
There are two accessory power outlets. One accessory  
power outlet is inside the center storage console and  
the other is located on the center storage console below  
the climate controls.  
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow  
the proper installation instructions included with  
the equipment.  
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When not in  
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.  
The accessory power outlet is operational at all times.  
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause  
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not  
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket  
from the plug because the power outlets are  
designed for accessory power plugs only.  
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for  
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off  
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied  
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment  
when not in use and do not plug in equipment  
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.  
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible  
with the accessory power outlet and could result  
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a  
problem, see your retailer for additional information  
on the accessory power outlet.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following are climate control settings that use  
more fuel:  
Climate Controls  
Normal air conditioning mode.  
The defrost mode.  
Automatic Climate Control System  
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle can  
be automatically controlled with this system.  
Extreme temperature settings, such as  
60°F (15°C) / 90F (32°C).  
High fan speed settings.  
To help reduce fuel usage:  
Use the full automatic control as described under  
Automatic Operation.  
Use hybrid air conditioning, instead of the normal  
air conditioning.  
Select a temperature setting that is higher in hot  
weather and lower in cold weather.  
Only use defrost to clear the windows.  
Climate Control Influence on Hybrid  
Operation and Fuel Economy  
The climate control system is dependent upon other  
vehicle systems for heat and power input. Certain  
climate control settings can lead to higher fuel usage  
and/or fewer Auto Stops.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Set the temperature.  
Automatic Operation  
An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) is recommended.  
Allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.  
AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fan  
speed knob and the air delivery mode knob to activate  
the automatic system. When automatic operation is  
active the system controls the inside temperature and  
air delivery.  
Press the w or xarrow temperature buttons  
to adjust the temperature setting as necessary.  
If the temperature is set at 60°F (15°C) the system  
remains at the maximum cooling setting. If the  
temperature is set at 90°F (32°C) the system  
remains at the maximum heat setting. Choosing  
either maximum setting does not cause the vehicle  
to heat or cool any faster.  
Use the steps below to place the entire system in full  
automatic control:  
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to the AUTO  
position.  
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the  
top of the instrument panel near the windshield.  
This sensor regulates air temperature based on the  
intensity of the sun.  
The current set temperature displays. When AUTO  
is selected, the air conditioning operation and air  
inlet is automatically controlled. The air conditioning  
compressor runs while the outside temperature is  
over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet is normally  
set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet can  
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to  
help quickly cool down the vehicle.  
Also do not cover the sensor grille on the lower  
right side of the climate control faceplate, as  
this regulates the inside temperature.  
To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up in cold  
weather, the system delays turning on the fan  
until warm air is available. The length of delay  
depends on the engine coolant temperature. Turning  
the fan knob overrides this delay and changes  
the fan to the selected speed.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Operation  
6(Floor): Use this mode to direct most of the air to  
the floor outlets with some air directed to the side  
window outlets.  
The air delivery mode or fan speed, can manually  
be adjusted.  
The right knob can also be used to select defog or  
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting  
can be found later in this section.  
Fan Speed Knob  
9(Off): Select this position to turn off the fan.  
Outside air still enters the vehicle. The direction  
can be changed by changing the mode position.  
The temperature can also be adjusted using either  
the up or down arrow temperature buttons.  
#(Normal Air Conditioning): Press this button to  
turn the air conditioning compressor on and off. A light  
above the button comes on while the air conditioning  
is on.  
9(Fan): Turn the knob with the fan symbol to  
When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTO mode,  
the system runs the air conditioning automatically to  
cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.  
manually adjust the fan speed.  
w x Temperature Control: Press the w and  
While in this mode, the hybrid system does not shut the  
engine down at complete stops.  
x arrows to increase or decrease the temperature  
inside the vehicle.  
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot  
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for  
your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows  
closed for the air conditioner to work its best.  
Air Delivery Mode Knob  
H(Vent): Use this mode to direct air to the instrument  
panel outlets.  
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation  
of the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm  
air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument  
panel outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, press  
the temperature buttons to the desired setting.  
)(Bi-Level): Use this mode to direct half of the air  
to the instrument panel outlets, and the remaining air to  
the floor outlets.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies the  
air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode,  
the system maximizes its performance by using  
recirculation as necessary.  
pressed, an indicator light above the button comes on.  
The recirculation indicator light blinks three times if  
recirculation is used in a mode in which it cannot  
function. Only use this mode when it is needed for  
comfort, since window fogging rapidly occurs if the air  
conditioning compressor is not engaged.  
Heating: On cold days when using manual operation of  
the automatic system, use floor mode to deliver air to  
the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, push  
the temperature buttons to the desired setting.  
Press this button to cancel the auto recirculation  
feature. Each time the vehicle is started, the system  
reverts to the auto recirculation function.  
To use the automatic mode, turn the knob to AUTO and  
adjust the temperature by pressing the temperature  
buttons.  
If recirculation is selected while in defrost, defog or floor  
mode, the light on the button flashes three times and  
then goes out to indicate that this is not allowed. This is  
to prevent window fogging.  
When the heater is in use, there might be slight noise or  
vibration during Auto Stops. This is due to the coolant  
circulation pump that continues to circulate heat through  
the system during the engine Auto Stop.  
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the  
system in recirculation for extended periods of time can  
cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the  
fog, select either defog or defrost. Make sure the  
air conditioning is on. Allow the air conditioning to run  
automatically to help dehumidify the air.  
The heater works best if the windows are kept closed.  
h (Recirculation): Press the button to turn on  
the recirculation mode. The air inside the vehicle  
recirculates through the climate control system and the  
vehicle, not from outside the vehicle. This mode is  
helpful when trying to limit odors from entering  
the vehicle and for maximum air conditioning  
performance in hot weather. When the button is  
N (Hybrid Air Conditioning): This setting balances  
fuel economy and air conditioning comfort. When  
hybrid A/C is used in warm weather, you may notice  
more frequent auto stops and the cabin may be warmer  
as compared to normal air conditioning.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maximum Air Conditioning  
Defogging and Defrosting  
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air  
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time  
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the  
system to operate more efficiently.  
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity  
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass.  
This can be minimized if the climate control system is  
used properly. There are two modes to choose from  
to clear fog or frost from the windshield. Use the defog  
mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and  
warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove  
fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.  
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:  
1. Select the C vent mode.  
2. Select the highest fan speed.  
3. Select # air conditioning.  
-(Defog): Turn the mode knob to this position to  
select the defog setting, which delivers air to the floor  
and windshield outlets. Use this setting to clear the  
windows of fog or moisture.  
4. Select the h recirculation mode.  
5. Select the coolest temperature.  
Using these settings together for long periods of time  
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry.  
To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle  
has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.  
0(Defrost): Turn the mode knob to this position to  
defrost the windshield. The system automatically  
controls the fan speed if defrost is selected from the  
AUTO mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or  
warmer, the air conditioning compressor automatically  
runs to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.  
The air conditioning indicator light blinks three times  
if the compressor is turned off while in this mode.  
The engine will not perform Auto Stops when the defrost  
mode is on.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Window Defogger  
Outlet Adjustment  
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to  
remove fog from the rear window.  
There are four main air outlets on the instrument panel.  
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet by  
moving it either side-to-side or up and down, to change  
the direction and amount of airflow in the vehicle. The  
center thumbwheel does not control the main outlets.  
<(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window  
defogger on or off. An indicator light above the  
button comes on to show that the rear window defogger  
is activated.  
Rear Seat Air Outlet  
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window  
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is  
pressed. If additional warming time is needed, press  
the button again.  
For vehicles with this feature, the rear seat air outlet is  
located in the center of the instrument panel above  
the two main center outlets.  
Use the thumbwheel in the center of the outlet to turn  
the airflow on or off. The horizontal vent vane does  
not move.  
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph  
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on  
once the button is pressed.  
Operation Tips  
If your vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the  
surface of the outside mirrors also heat when the rear  
window defogger is activated. See Outside Power  
Mirrors on page 2-34.  
Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air  
inlets at the base of the windshield that can  
block the flow of air into the vehicle.  
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object  
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere  
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.  
These actions may damage the rear defogger.  
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.  
Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectors as  
they could adversely affect the performance of  
the system.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Warning lights come on when there could be or there  
is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you  
will see in the details on the next few pages, some  
warning lights come on briefly when you start the  
engine just to let you know they are working. If you are  
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed  
when this happens.  
Keep the path under the front seats clear of  
objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle  
more effectively.  
When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is  
encountered, use the recirculation mode, with the  
temperature knob at a comfortable setting to prevent  
the odor from entering the vehicle through the  
ventilation system. This can be helpful when  
driving through a long tunnel with poor ventilation.  
However, extended usage of this mode in cold  
or cool weather can cause window fogging.  
Gages can indicate when there could be or there is a  
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often  
gages and warning lights work together to let you know  
when there is a problem with your vehicle.  
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays  
on when you are driving, or when one of the gages  
shows there may be a problem, check the section that  
tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s  
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and  
even dangerous. Get to know your warning lights and  
gages. They are a big help.  
Warning Lights, Gages,  
and Indicators  
This part describes the warning lights and gages that  
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you  
locate them.  
Warning lights and gages can signal that something  
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause  
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention  
to your warning lights and gages could also save you  
or others from injury.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Cluster  
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast  
you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically.  
Your vehicle has this instrument panel cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on  
the following pages.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Speedometer and Odometer  
Trip Odometer  
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in miles  
per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). See  
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-51 for more  
information.  
The trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven  
since you last reset it.  
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the  
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and  
Displays on page 3-44 for more information.  
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been  
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)  
or kilometers (used in Canada).  
Tachometer  
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The  
digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone tries to  
turn it back.  
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in  
revolutions per minute (rpm).  
Your vehicle has auto stop and the indicator for this is  
on the tachometer. For more information see Auto  
Stop Mode on page 3-42.  
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a  
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to  
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must  
be. But if it can’t, then it is set at zero and a label must  
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage  
reading when the new odometer was installed.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light  
Safety Belt Reminders  
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime  
will sound for several seconds to remind the front  
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only  
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger  
Sensing System on page 1-63 for more information.  
The passenger safety belt light, located on the  
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for  
several seconds and then flash for several more.  
Safety Belt Reminder Light  
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for  
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety  
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.  
The safety belt light will  
also come on and stay on  
for several seconds, then it  
will flash for several more.  
This chime and light are  
repeated if the passenger  
remains unbuckled and  
the vehicle is in motion.  
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains  
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt  
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will  
come on.  
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the  
chime nor the light will come on.  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Airbag Readiness Light  
{CAUTION:  
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument  
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The  
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for  
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical  
problem. The system check includes the airbag  
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the  
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.  
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag  
System on page 1-54.  
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you  
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system  
may not be working properly. The airbags in  
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they  
could even inflate without a crash. To help  
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your  
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag  
readiness light stays on after you start your  
vehicle.  
This light will come on  
when you start your  
vehicle, and it will flash  
for a few seconds.  
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds  
when you start the engine. If the light does not come on  
then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a problem with  
the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information Center  
(DIC) message may also come on. See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-46 for more information.  
The light should go out  
and the system is ready.  
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start  
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,  
your airbag system may not work properly.  
Have your vehicle serviced right away.  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger  
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front  
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact  
airbag are enabled (may inflate).  
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator  
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.  
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status  
indicator.  
{CAUTION:  
If the on indicator comes on when you have  
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the  
right front passenger’s seat, it means that  
the passenger sensing system has not  
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag and  
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front  
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the  
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be  
very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a  
rear-facing child restraint in the right front  
passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.  
United States  
Canada  
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status  
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on  
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you  
use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,  
if equipped, you may not see the system check.  
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator  
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol  
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s  
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights  
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may  
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing  
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.  
{CAUTION:  
Even though the passenger sensing system is  
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s  
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact  
airbag (if equipped) if the system detects  
a rear-facing child restraint, no system is  
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an  
airbag will not deploy under some unusual  
circumstance, even though it is turned off.  
We recommend that rear-facing child restraints  
be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag  
is or airbags are off.  
{CAUTION:  
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument  
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,  
it means that something may be wrong with  
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have  
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an  
adult-size person sitting in the right front  
passenger’s seat may not have the protection  
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light  
on page 3-29 for more on this, including  
important safety information.  
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger  
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger  
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s  
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63 for more  
on this, including important safety information.  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Charging System Light  
Brake System Warning Light  
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into  
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can  
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,  
you need both parts working well.  
This light will come on  
briefly when you turn on  
the ignition key, but  
the engine is not running,  
as a check to show  
you it is working.  
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.  
Have your brake system inspected right away.  
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays  
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem  
with the charging system. A charging system Driver  
Information Center (DIC) message may also appear.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46  
for more information. This light could indicate that  
there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that  
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right  
away. If you must drive a short distance with the light on,  
be certain to turn off all the accessories, such as  
the radio and air conditioner.  
United States  
Canada  
This light should come on briefly when you turn the  
ignition key to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then,  
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there  
is a problem.  
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light  
will also come on when you set your parking brake.  
The light will stay on if your parking brake does  
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake  
is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display a  
BRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-46 for more information.  
Antilock Brake System  
Warning Light  
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off  
the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the  
pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to  
the floor. It may take longer to stop. Try turning off and  
restarting the vehicle one or two times, if the light is  
still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing  
Your Vehicle on page 4-27.  
This light will come  
on briefly when you  
start the engine.  
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it  
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.  
{CAUTION:  
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light  
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is  
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the  
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still  
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,  
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system  
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do  
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system  
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock  
brakes and there is a problem with your regular brakes.  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-32  
Your brake system may not be working  
properly if the brake system warning light is  
on. Driving with the brake system warning  
light on can lead to an accident. If the light  
is still on after you have pulled off the road  
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed  
for service.  
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),  
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for  
all brake related DIC messages.  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and  
potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check  
your DIC messaging to determine which feature(s) is  
no longer functioning and whether it is because of  
the driver turning off the feature(s), or the system may  
not be working properly and your vehicle requires  
service. If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin will not be  
limited. If the ESC system is disabled, the system  
will not aid in maintaining vehicle directional control.  
In either case, adjust your driving accordingly.  
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Indicator/Warning Light  
This light is located  
in the center of the  
instrument panel cluster.  
If the light is on and flashing, the TCS or the ESC  
system is actively working. Check the DIC messaging  
for details to determine which system is working.  
If the LOW TRACTION message appears, the system  
is limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE message  
appears, the system is aiding in maintaining vehicle  
directional control.  
For vehicles that have the Electronic Stability Control  
(ESC) system or the Traction Control System (TCS),  
this warning light should come on briefly when the  
engine is started.  
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more  
information.  
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed  
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.  
This light, along with the appropriate Driver Information  
Center (DIC) messages, indicates when the ESC  
system and the TCS are working or are disabled.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for  
more information on the messages associated with  
this light.  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Coolant Temperature  
Warning Light  
Tire Pressure Light  
Your vehicle has a  
tire pressure light.  
This light indicates  
that the engine coolant  
has overheated or  
the radiator cooling  
fan is not working.  
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started  
and provides information about tire pressures and  
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.  
This light will come on briefly when you turn on the  
ignition as a check to show you it is working.  
When the Light is Solid  
If the light comes on and the vehicle has been operating  
under normal driving conditions, pull off the road, stop  
the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible.  
This indicates that one or more of your tires are  
significantly underinflated.  
See Cooling System on page 5-28 for more information.  
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information  
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for more  
information. Stop and check your tires as soon as it is  
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper  
pressure. See Tires on page 5-46 for more information.  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The check engine light  
comes on to indicate  
that there is an OBD II  
problem and service  
is required.  
When the Light Flashes First and  
Then is Solid  
This indicates that there may be a problem with the  
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes  
for about a minute and stays on solid for the remainder  
of the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with  
every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System  
on page 5-53 for more information.  
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before  
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious  
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to  
assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any  
malfunction.  
Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
Check Engine Light  
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board  
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation  
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.  
It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable  
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce  
a cleaner environment.  
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this  
light on, after a while, the emission controls might  
not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy might  
not be as good, and the engine might not run as  
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might  
not be covered by your warranty.  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,  
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your  
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with  
other than those of the same Tire Performance  
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission  
controls and can cause this light to come on.  
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly  
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could  
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission  
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 5-3.  
If the Light is Flashing  
The following can prevent more serious damage to  
your vehicle:  
Reduce vehicle speed.  
Avoid hard accelerations.  
Avoid steep uphill grades.  
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,  
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.  
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,  
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.  
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart  
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see  
“If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is  
still flashing, follow the previous steps and see your  
dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.  
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,  
when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN but the engine  
is not running. If the light does not come on, have  
it repaired. This light also comes on during a malfunction  
in one of two ways:  
Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been  
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions  
and could damage the emission control system  
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might  
be required.  
Light On Steady — An emission control system  
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.  
Diagnosis and service might be required.  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you experience one or more of these conditions,  
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least  
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.  
If the Light Is On Steady  
You might be able to correct the emission system  
malfunction by considering the following:  
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,  
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your  
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and  
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical  
problems that might have developed.  
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?  
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install  
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The  
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has  
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing  
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.  
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed  
should turn the light off.  
Emissions Inspection and  
Maintenance Programs  
Some state/provincial and local governments have or  
might begin programs to inspect the emission control  
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this  
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle  
registration.  
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?  
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The  
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system  
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.  
Here are some things you need to know to help your  
vehicle pass an inspection:  
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?  
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See  
Gasoline Octane on page 5-6. Poor fuel quality causes  
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You  
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when  
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on  
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these  
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.  
This will be detected by the system and cause the light  
to turn on.  
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check  
engine light is on or not working properly.  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD  
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical  
emission control systems have not been completely  
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be  
This light will come on briefly when you turn on the  
ignition as a check to show you it is working. If it does  
not come on with the ignition on, you may have a  
problem with the bulb. Have it fixed right away.  
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if  
you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery  
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to  
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal  
driving. This can take several days of routine driving. If  
you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass  
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your  
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.  
If you do, your engine can become so hot that  
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.  
Check your oil as soon as possible and have  
your vehicle serviced.  
Oil Pressure Light  
If your vehicle has low  
engine oil pressure, this  
light will stay on after  
you start your engine,  
or come on and you will  
hear a chime when you  
are driving.  
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance  
may damage the engine. The repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Always follow  
the maintenance schedule in this manual for  
changing engine oil.  
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough  
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have  
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security Light  
Highbeam On Light  
For information regarding  
this light and the vehicle’s  
security system, see  
on page 2-15.  
This light comes on when  
the high-beam headlamps  
are in use.  
for more information.  
Cruise Control Light  
This light comes on  
whenever you set  
the cruise control.  
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.  
See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are four things that some owners ask about.  
These are normal and do not indicate a problem with  
your fuel gage:  
Fuel Gage  
At the service station, the gas pump shuts off  
before the gage reads full.  
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the  
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have  
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually  
took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity  
to fill the tank.  
The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner  
or speed up.  
United States  
Canada  
The gage goes back to empty when you turn off  
the ignition.  
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you  
have left, when the ignition is on. When the indicator  
nears empty, a LOW FUEL message will appear on  
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-46 for more information.  
You still have a little fuel left, but you should get more  
soon. The arrow on the fuel gage points to side of  
the vehicle with the fuel door.  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Auto Stop Mode  
Charge/Assist Gage  
The charge/assist gage  
displays the charge into  
and out of the battery.  
United States  
Canada  
This mark on the tachometer shows that the engine  
is in Auto Stop mode which is a fuel saving operation.  
When the ignition key is turned off, the tachometer  
needle will drop to OFF. If the driver’s door is opened  
while in Auto Stop, a chime will sound.  
When the electric motor is assisting the engine as in a  
maximum acceleration, the needle will move to the  
Assist range. When the electric motor operates as a  
generator to perform regenerative braking while  
decelerating, the needle will move to the Charge range.  
See Regenerative Braking on page 2-29 for more  
information. The needle will also move into the Charge  
region if the hybrid control system deems it is an  
efficient time to charge the hybrid battery. This may  
occur when the vehicle is coasting. If the hybrid battery  
or other hybrid components are very hot or cold, the  
Charge and Assist functions may be suspended until the  
component temperatures are normal.  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuel Economy Light  
Driver Information Center (DIC)  
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).  
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your  
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display  
driver personalization menu modes and warning/status  
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,  
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.  
If enabled, this light will  
come on briefly when the  
vehicle is started.  
The DIC buttons are  
located on the left side  
of the steering wheel.  
This light will also come on when the vehicle is operating  
at a fuel efficient point.  
This light can be disabled by using the Driver  
Information Center (DIC) buttons. With the engine off  
and the key turned to ACC/ACCESSORY, set the DIC  
to the outside air temperature and odometer mode.  
Press and hold the reset button for several seconds.  
The light will come on solid and then flash several  
times and turn off to indicate it is disabled. Repeat  
the procedure to enable the light. See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-46 for more information.  
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through  
the vehicle information mode displays.  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,  
see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on  
page 3-51.  
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle  
information mode displays, select a personalization menu  
mode setting, or acknowledge a warning message.  
TRIP A or TRIP B  
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the  
same time for one second, then release the buttons  
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle  
Personalization on page 3-51 for more information.  
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B  
display. These modes show the current distance  
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in  
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers  
can be used at the same time.  
DIC Operation and Displays  
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has  
different modes which can be accessed by pressing the  
DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the  
following.  
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the  
reset button for a few seconds while the desired  
trip odometer is displayed.  
FUEL RANGE  
Information Modes  
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE  
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance  
you can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or  
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the fuel  
remaining in the tank.  
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through  
the following vehicle information modes:  
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer  
Press the information button until the outside air  
temperature and the odometer display. This mode shows  
the temperature outside of the vehicle in either degrees  
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and the total  
distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)  
or kilometers (km). The outside air temperature appears  
on the left side of the DIC display and the odometer  
appears on the right side of the display.  
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.  
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range  
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your  
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.  
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)  
AV (Average) SPEED  
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG  
displays. This mode shows how many miles per  
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your  
vehicle is getting based on current and past driving  
conditions.  
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.  
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in  
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).  
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the  
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.  
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the  
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.  
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting  
from that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset,  
it is continually updated each time you drive.  
OIL LIFE  
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.  
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s  
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system  
is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil  
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.  
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)  
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST  
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy  
at a particular moment and changes frequently as  
driving conditions change. This mode shows the  
instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg)  
or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average  
fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.  
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil  
life, additional maintenance is recommended in the  
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil  
on page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.  
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil  
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”  
under Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.  
Under most coast conditions or at an idle stop,  
AUTOSTOP displays. This means that the electric  
motor is on, the gas engine is off, and the engine is  
not using any fuel.  
COOLANT  
Press the information button until COOLANT displays.  
This mode shows the temperature of the engine coolant  
in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Pressure  
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF  
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.  
The tire pressure is shown in either pounds per square  
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the information  
button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays for the front  
tires. Press the information button again until  
This message displays if the automatic headlamp  
system is disabled with the headlamp switch. See  
Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-15 for more  
information.  
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON  
LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.  
This message displays if the automatic headlamp  
system is enabled with the headlamp switch. See  
Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-15 for more  
information.  
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system  
while driving, a message advising you to check the  
tire pressure appears in the display. See Inflation - Tire  
Messages on page 3-46 for more information.  
BRAKE FLUID  
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when  
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning  
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-32 for more  
information. Have the brake system serviced by your  
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.  
DIC Warnings and Messages  
These messages appear if there is a problem detected  
in one of your vehicle’s systems.  
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no  
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear  
it from the display, press and hold any of the DIC  
buttons. If the condition is still present, the warning  
message comes back on the next time the vehicle  
is turned off and back on. With most messages,  
a warning chime sounds when the message displays.  
Your vehicle may have other warning messages.  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHANGE OIL SOON  
CRUISE ENGAGED  
This message displays when the life of the engine oil  
has expired and it should be changed.  
This message displays when the cruise control system  
is active. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more  
information.  
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from  
the display, the engine oil life system must still be  
reset separately. See Engine Oil Life System on  
page 5-18 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4  
for more information.  
DOOR AJAR  
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s  
doors are not closed properly. Make sure that the  
door(s) are closed completely.  
CHECK GAS CAP  
ENGINE DISABLED  
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been  
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure  
that it is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap  
properly installed should turn the message off.  
This message displays if the starting of the engine is  
disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer immediately.  
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED  
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)  
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine power  
is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the  
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,  
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed  
to your destination. The performance may be reduced  
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may  
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,  
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime  
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken  
to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.  
This message displays when the pressure in one or  
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. If a tire  
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon  
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to  
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label.  
See Tires on page 5-46, Loading Your Vehicle on  
page 4-22, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.  
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See  
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-44. If the tire  
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light  
comes on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-35.  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE  
HOOD AJAR  
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),  
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on  
the instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is  
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.  
You may feel or hear the system working and see this  
message displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditions  
may exist when this message is displayed, so adjust  
your driving accordingly. This message may stay on for  
a few seconds after ESC stops assisting you with  
directional control of the vehicle. This is normal when  
the system is operating. See Electronic Stability Control  
Light on page 3-34 for more information.  
This message displays if the hood is not fully closed.  
Make sure that the hood is closed completely. The  
vehicle will not auto stop when the hood is ajar.  
ICE POSSIBLE  
This message displays when the outside air temperature  
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust  
your driving accordingly.  
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW  
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry  
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery  
in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under  
on page 2-4.  
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF  
LOW FUEL  
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),  
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on  
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when  
ESC is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
for more information.  
This message displays when your vehicle is low on  
fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel  
Gage on page 3-41, Fuel on page 5-6, and Filling  
the Tank on page 5-8 for more information.  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOW TRACTION  
SERVICE AIR BAG  
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),  
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on  
the instrument panel cluster flashes when the system  
is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions  
may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust  
your driving accordingly. This message stays on for a  
few seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.  
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 and  
for more information.  
This message displays when there is a problem with  
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer immediately.  
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY  
CONTROL)  
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),  
this message displays and a chime sounds if there has  
been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS  
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This  
light stays on solid as long as the detected problem  
remains present. When this message displays, the  
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
for more information.  
LOW WASHER FLUID  
This message displays when the vehicle’s windshield  
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid  
reservoir to the proper level as soon as possible.  
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-32.  
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull  
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.  
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and  
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns  
back on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs  
service. Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer  
as soon as possible.  
POWER STEERING  
This message displays if a problem has been detected  
with the electric power steering. Have your vehicle  
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.  
PUSH PARK PEDAL  
This message displays if the parking brake is left  
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 2-28 for  
more information.  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SERVICE HYBRID  
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR  
This message displays if the hybrid components need  
to be serviced. Have your vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer.  
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure  
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire  
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during  
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on  
page 3-35. Several conditions may cause this message  
page 5-55 for more information. If the warning comes on  
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.  
See your dealer/retailer.  
SERVICE TRACTION  
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),  
this message displays and a chime sounds when  
the system is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCS  
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster.  
This light stays on solid as long as the detected problem  
remains present. When this message displays, the  
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
for more information. Have the system serviced by your  
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.  
TRACTION OFF  
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),  
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on  
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the  
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
for more information.  
SRVC (Service) HILL START  
This message displays if there is a problem with the  
hill start assist function. Have your vehicle serviced by  
your dealer/retailer.  
TRUNK AJAR  
This message displays when the trunk is not closed  
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed  
completely. See Trunk on page 2-10 for more  
information.  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalization Menu Modes  
OIL LIFE RESET  
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine  
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life  
System on page 5-18. See “OIL LIFE” under DIC  
Operation and Displays on page 3-44 for more  
information.  
DIC Vehicle Personalization  
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow  
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.  
All of the features listed may not be available on  
your vehicle. Only the features available will be  
displayed on the DIC.  
The default settings for the features were set when your  
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from  
their default state since that time.  
UNITS  
This feature allows you to select the units of  
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle  
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press  
and hold the reset button for at least one second to  
scroll through the available settings:  
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:  
Entering Personalization Menu  
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.  
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is  
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.  
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information  
will be displayed in English units.  
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at  
the same time for one second, then release to enter  
the personalization menu.  
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be  
displayed in metric units.  
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),  
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting is  
displayed on the DIC.  
3. Press the information button to scroll through the  
available personalization menu modes.  
Press the reset button to scroll through the available  
settings for each mode.  
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,  
the display will go back to the previous information  
displayed.  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LOCK HORN  
UNLOCK HORN  
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp  
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry  
(RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.  
When LOCK HORN appears on the display, press and  
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll  
through the available settings:  
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on  
the first press of the unlock button on the Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.  
When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display, press and  
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll  
through the available settings:  
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press  
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn  
will still chirp on the second press.  
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock  
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.  
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock  
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock  
button on the RKE transmitter.  
button on the RKE transmitter.  
on page 2-4 for more information.  
on page 2-4 for more information.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting  
is displayed on the DIC.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting  
is displayed on the DIC.  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIGHT FLASH  
DELAY LOCK  
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior  
hazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock,  
unlock, or trunk release buttons on the Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) transmitter are pressed, can be enabled  
or disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on the  
display, press and hold the reset button for at least  
one second to scroll through the available settings:  
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the  
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY  
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset  
button for at least one second to scroll through the  
available settings:  
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds  
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily  
override delayed locking by pressing the power lock  
switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry  
(RKE) transmitter a second time.  
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will  
not flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons  
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.  
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting  
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons  
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.  
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing  
the power lock switch or the lock button on the  
RKE transmitter.  
on page 2-4 for more information.  
System Operation on page 2-4 for more information.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting  
is displayed on the DIC.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting  
is displayed on the DIC.  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)  
UNLK (Unlock)  
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically  
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When  
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold  
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through  
the available settings:  
This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is selected  
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines  
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When  
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset  
button for at least one second to scroll through the  
available settings:  
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.  
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is  
turned off.  
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.  
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.  
You will need to manually unlock the doors.  
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock  
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).  
for more information.  
for more information.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting  
is displayed on the DIC.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting  
is displayed on the DIC.  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS  
LANGUAGE  
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior  
perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock button  
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is  
pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When EXT  
LIGHTS appears on the display, press and hold the  
reset button for at least one second to scroll through  
the available settings:  
This feature allows you to select the language in which  
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on  
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least  
one second to scroll through the available settings:  
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in  
English.  
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.  
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.  
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.  
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on  
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is  
pressed.  
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn  
on when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter  
is pressed.  
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization  
menu mode, press the information button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
on page 2-4 for more information.  
Exiting Personalization Menu  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting  
is displayed on the DIC.  
The personalization menu will be exited when any of  
the following conditions occur:  
A ten second time period has elapsed.  
The ignition is turned off.  
The end of the personalization menu list is reached.  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While your vehicle is parked:  
Audio System(s)  
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read  
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its  
features.  
Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.  
Familiarize yourself with its operation.  
Set up your audio system by presetting your  
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and  
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving  
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite  
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel  
controls if the vehicle has them.  
{CAUTION:  
This system provides you with far greater  
access to audio stations and song listings.  
Giving extended attention to entertainment  
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you  
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep  
your eyes on the road and your mind on the  
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching  
while driving.  
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to  
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,  
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make  
sure that it can be added by checking with your  
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering  
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment  
can be added, it is very important to do it properly.  
Added sound equipment may interfere with the  
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other  
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s  
systems may interfere with the operation of sound  
equipment that has been added.  
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe  
driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. Here  
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction  
while driving.  
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory  
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be  
played even after the ignition is turned off. See  
more information.  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The date does not automatically display. To see the  
Setting the Clock  
date press the H (clock) button while the radio is  
on. The date with display times out after a few seconds  
and goes back to the normal radio and time display.  
Your vehicle has a radio with a H (clock) button for  
setting the time and date.  
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to  
24 hour or to change the date default setting from  
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these  
instructions:  
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:  
1. Turn the radio on.  
2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,  
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)  
displays.  
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton  
located under the forward arrow label. Once  
the time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY  
(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,  
month, and year) displays.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the  
labels to be changed. Every time the pushbutton is  
pressed again, the time or the date if selected,  
increases by one.  
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired  
option.  
Another way to increase the time or date, is to  
press the right ¨SEEK arrow or \FWD  
3. Press the H button again to apply the selected  
(forward) button.  
default, or let the screen time out.  
To decrease the time or date, press the left ©  
SEEK arrow or sREV (reverse) button, or  
turn the f knob, located on the upper right side  
of the radio.  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the  
station name or call letters display. In rare cases,  
a radio station can broadcast incorrect information  
that causes the radio features to work improperly.  
If this happens, contact the radio station.  
Radio(s)  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based  
in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian  
provinces. XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety  
of programming and commercial-free music,  
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your  
trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited  
access to XM™ Radio Online for when you are not  
in your vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the  
XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™  
at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the  
U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677  
in Canada.  
Radio with CD (MP3)  
Radio Data System (RDS)  
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).  
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations  
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies  
upon receiving specific information from these stations  
and only works when the information is available.  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playing the Radio  
Finding a Station  
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system  
on and off.  
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM,  
or XM™ (if equipped).  
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or  
decrease the volume.  
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.  
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio  
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). When SCV  
is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts to  
compensate for road and wind noise as you speed  
up or slow down while driving. That way, the volume  
level should sound about the same as you drive.  
To activate SCV:  
©SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous or  
to the next station and stay there.  
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for  
a few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to  
a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the  
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.  
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.  
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a  
strong signal that are in the selected band.  
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3,  
and RDS Features): Press to display additional  
text information related to the current FM-RDS or  
MP3 song. A choice of additional information such  
as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category)  
can appear. Continue pressing this button to highlight  
the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned  
under any one of the labels and the information  
about that label displays.  
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM  
label on the radio display.  
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed  
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,  
or High) to select the level of radio volume  
compensation. The display times out after  
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting  
allows for more radio volume compensation at  
faster vehicle speeds.  
While information is not available, No Info displays.  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the  
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites  
pages, perform the following steps:  
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite  
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station  
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your  
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and  
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature.  
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.  
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
2. Press the pushbutton located below the  
FAV 1-6 label.  
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be  
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons  
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and  
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).  
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages  
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available  
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any  
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.  
To store a station as a favorite, perform the following  
steps:  
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by  
pressing the pushbutton located below the  
displayed page numbers.  
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,  
to return to the original main radio screen showing  
the radio station frequency labels and to begin  
the process of programming your favorites for the  
chosen amount of numbered pages.  
1. Tune to the desired radio station.  
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the  
station is to be stored.  
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a  
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed  
and released again, the station that was set,  
returns.  
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station you want  
stored as a favorite.  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset  
equalization settings.  
Setting the Tone  
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)  
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until  
Manual displays or press the f knob to adjust the  
bass, midrange, or treble.  
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To  
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until  
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to  
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton  
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)  
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob  
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted  
setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted  
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or  
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels  
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired  
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under  
the desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.  
The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing  
by pressing either SEEK arrow, \FWD (forward) or  
s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels  
are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or has  
static, decrease the treble.  
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle  
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the  
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.  
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle  
position.  
either SEEK arrow, \FWD or sREV button until  
the desired levels are obtained.  
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,  
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or  
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds  
and the level adjusts to the middle position.  
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the  
middle position, press the f knob for more than  
two seconds until a beep sounds.  
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the  
middle position, press the f knob for more than  
two seconds until a beep sounds.  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through  
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,  
perform the following:  
Finding a Category (CAT) Station  
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™  
stations while the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find  
XM™ channels within a desired category, perform  
the following:  
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT  
label.  
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency  
displays. Press the CAT button to display the  
category labels. Continue pressing the CAT button  
until the desired category name displays.  
3. Turn the f knob to display the category you want  
removed.  
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired  
category label to immediately tune to the first  
XM™ station associated with that category.  
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove  
label until the category name along with the word  
Removed displays.  
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.  
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right  
or left arrows displayed, or press the SEEK arrows  
to go to the previous or to the next XM™ station  
within the selected category.  
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the  
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed  
category displays or by pressing the pushbutton under  
the Restore All label.  
4. To exit the category search mode, press the  
FAV button or BAND button to display your  
favorites again.  
Categories cannot be removed or added while the  
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on  
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track  
number displays.  
Radio Messages  
Calibration Error: The audio system has been  
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.  
If Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio  
has not been configured properly for your vehicle  
and it must be returned to your dealer/retailer for  
service.  
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)  
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the  
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.  
Care of Your CDs  
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced  
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality  
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the  
CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.  
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective  
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The  
CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the  
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,  
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not  
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while  
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs  
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole  
and the outer edge.  
Locked: This message displays when the  
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.  
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot  
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.  
Radio Messages for XM™ Only  
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-71  
Playing a CD  
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The  
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.  
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free  
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral  
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.  
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center  
to the edge.  
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the  
player, it stays in the player. While the ignition or radio  
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,  
if it was the last selected audio source.  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Care of Your CD Player  
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start  
of the current track, if more than ten seconds have  
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.  
If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,  
the player continues moving backward or forward  
through the tracks on the CD.  
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the  
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer  
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top  
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.  
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,  
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics  
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.  
sREV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse  
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at  
a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.  
The elapsed time of the track displays.  
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one  
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is  
made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD  
player could be damaged. While using the CD player,  
use only CDs in good condition without any label,  
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and  
the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,  
and debris.  
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance  
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a  
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.  
The elapsed time of the track displays.  
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks can  
be listened to in random, rather than sequential order.  
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this  
section.  
To use random, do one of the following:  
Z EJECT: Press to eject a CD. To eject the CD that is  
currently playing, press and release this button. A beep  
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is  
ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.  
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD  
automatically pulls back into the player and begins  
playing.  
Press the CD/AUX button and insert a disc partway  
into the slot of the CD player. The RDM label  
displays.  
Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM  
label until Random Current Disc displays.  
Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play.  
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently  
playing.  
3-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is playing.  
The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.  
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and  
try again.  
There could have been a problem while burning  
the CD.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while  
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message  
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD is  
in the player. Press again and the system automatically  
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable  
audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected,  
No Input Device Found displays.  
The label could be caught in the CD player.  
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,  
try a known good CD.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be  
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio  
displays an error message, write it down and provide it  
to your dealer/retailer while reporting the problem.  
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc  
Your radio system has a single CD (MP3) player,  
it is capable of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.  
For more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R  
or CD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 3-66 later  
in this section.  
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack  
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located  
on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not  
an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the  
front auxiliary input jack. However, an external audio  
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,  
CD changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary  
input jack for use as another source for audio listening.  
CD Messages  
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or the CD  
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:  
It is very hot. When the temperature returns  
to normal, the CD should play.  
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device  
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving  
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.  
You are driving on a very rough road. When the  
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.  
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.  
3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm  
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.  
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX  
button to begin playing audio from the device over  
the vehicle speakers.  
Using an MP3  
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc  
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a  
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with  
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,  
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,  
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and  
320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name,  
and album are available for display by the radio  
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.  
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or  
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume  
of the portable player. Additional volume adjustments  
can be made from the portable device if the volume  
is not loud or soft enough.  
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable  
audio device is playing. The portable audio device  
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or  
turn it off.  
Compressed Audio  
The radio also plays discs that contain both  
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.  
By default the radio reads only the uncompressed  
audio and ignore the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT  
button toggles between compressed and uncompressed  
audio format.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a  
portable audio device is playing. Press again and  
the system begins playing audio from the connected  
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is  
not connected, No Input Device Found displays.  
3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MP3 Format  
Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist  
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a  
combination of a large number of files and folders,  
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play  
up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,  
or sessions. If you wish to play a large number of  
files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the  
length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long  
names also take up more space on the display,  
potentially getting cut off.  
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:  
Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R  
or CD-RW disc.  
Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc.  
The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of  
50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.  
Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find  
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using  
one folder for each album. Each folder or album  
should contain 18 songs or less.  
Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to  
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not  
to function in the player.  
Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to  
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total number  
of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the  
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a  
particular folder during playback.  
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and  
next folder buttons, the tune knob, or the SEEK arrows.  
You can also play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that was  
recorded using no file folders. If a CD-R or CD-RW  
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,  
50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you access  
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the  
maximum are not accessible.  
Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension  
(other file extensions might not work).  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Root Directory  
Order of Play  
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a  
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,  
the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained  
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any  
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always  
accessed before root folders or files.  
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in  
the following order:  
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist  
and continues sequentially through all tracks in  
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist  
has played, play continues from the first track of  
the first playlist.  
Empty Directory or Folder  
Play begins from the first track in the first folder  
and continues sequentially through all tracks in  
each folder. When the last track of the last folder  
has played, play continues from the first track of  
the first folder.  
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the  
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders  
and no compressed files directly beneath them, the  
player advances to the next folder in the file structure  
that contains compressed audio files. The empty  
folder does not display.  
When play enters a new folder, the display does not  
automatically show the new folder name unless  
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.  
The new track name displays.  
No Folder  
When a CD contains only compressed files, the files are  
located under the root folder. The next and previous  
folder function does not function on a CD that was  
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying  
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.  
File System and Naming  
The song name that displays is the song name that is  
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present  
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name  
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.  
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed  
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the  
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons  
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.  
When the radio displays the name of the folder the  
radio displays ROOT.  
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages  
are shortened. The display does not show parts of  
words on the last page of text and the extension of the  
filename does not display.  
3-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preprogrammed Playlists  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the  
CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.  
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using  
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software  
can be accessed, however, there is no playlist editing  
capability using the radio. These playlists are treated as  
special folders containing compressed audio song files.  
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the  
start of the current MP3 file, if more than 10 seconds  
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to  
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or  
pressed multiple times, the player continues moving  
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.  
Playing an MP3  
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot, label  
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW  
should begin playing.  
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton  
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track  
in the previous folder.  
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD-R or  
CD-RW is in the player, it stays in the player. When  
the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW  
starts to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected  
audio source.  
c T(Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned  
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the  
next folder.  
As each new track starts to play, the track number and  
song title displays.  
sREV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to  
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is  
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to  
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the  
file displays.  
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject  
CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW  
that is currently playing, press and release this button.  
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once  
the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R  
or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW  
is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R  
or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player  
and begins playing.  
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button  
to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound  
is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button  
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time  
of the file displays.  
3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on  
the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random,  
rather than sequential order. To play MP3 files from a  
CD-R or CD-RW in random order, press the pushbutton  
positioned under the RDM label until Random Current  
Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn  
off random play.  
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,  
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.  
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the  
album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label  
to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the  
album name is displayed on the second line between the  
arrows and songs from the current album begins to play.  
Once all songs from that album are played, the player  
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the  
CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files from  
that album.  
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator  
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order  
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below  
the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to  
sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It  
can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on  
the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.  
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc  
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R  
or CD-RW begins playing again.  
To exit the music navigator mode, press the pushbutton  
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while a  
CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio  
for future listening.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a  
CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon and  
a message showing disc and/or track number displays  
while a CD is in the player. Press this button again  
and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary  
input device such as a portable audio player. If a  
portable audio player is not connected, No Input  
Device Found displays.  
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to playing  
MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist playing is  
shown on the second line of the display between the  
arrows. Once all songs by that artist are played, the  
player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on  
the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files by that  
artist. To listen to MP3 files by another artist, press the  
pushbutton located below either arrow button. The disc  
goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.  
Continue pressing either button until the desired artist  
displays.  
3-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No CAT Info: No category information is available at  
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.  
XM Radio Messages  
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,  
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,  
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).  
No Information: No text or informational messages are  
available at this time on this channel. The system is  
working properly.  
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is  
being updated, and no action is required. This process  
should take no longer than 30 seconds.  
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for  
the selected category. The system is working properly.  
XM TheftLocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could  
have previously been in another vehicle. For security  
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between  
vehicles. If this message appears after having your  
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.  
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but  
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™  
signal. When you move into an open area, the signal  
should return.  
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and  
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.  
This message should disappear shortly.  
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message  
alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label.  
This label is needed to activate the service.  
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in  
service. Tune to another channel.  
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to  
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with  
your dealer/retailer.  
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is  
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station  
was one of the presets, choose another station for that  
preset button.  
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear  
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a  
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.  
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this  
time on this channel. The system is working properly.  
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear within  
a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.  
Consult with your dealer/retailer.  
No Title Info: No song title information is available at  
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.  
3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
+ e e (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to  
Theft-Deterrent Feature  
increase or to decrease the volume.  
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your  
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by  
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different  
vehicle, it does not operate and LOC, LOCK, or  
LOCKED could display.  
wx (Previous/Next): Press the arrows to go to the  
previous or to the next stored radio station and stay  
there. Press and hold the arrows briefly to advance to  
the previous or to the next station with a strong signal in  
the selected band.  
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not  
operate if stolen.  
When a CD is playing, press the arrows to go to the  
previous or to the next track. Press and hold the arrows  
briefly to continue reversing back or advancing ahead  
to other tracks within the disc.  
Audio Steering Wheel Controls  
g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button to  
silence the system. Press this button again to turn the  
sound on. If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and  
hold this button for two seconds to activate voice on  
the OnStar® system. See the OnStar® System on  
page 2-35 in this manual for more information.  
Radio controls are  
located on the right side  
of the steering wheel.  
If your vehicle has  
this feature, some audio  
controls can be adjusted  
at this location. They  
include the following:  
3-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FM Stereo  
Radio Reception  
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only  
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings  
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the  
sound to fade in and out.  
Frequency interference and static can occur during  
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone  
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and  
external electronic devices are plugged into the  
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,  
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio  
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous  
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,  
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio  
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In  
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,  
bridges, garages, or through tunnels could cause loss  
of the XM signal for a period of time. The radio may  
display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.  
AM  
The range for most AM stations is greater than for  
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause  
station frequencies to interfere with each other.  
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations  
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce  
these levels during the night. Static can also occur  
when things like storms and power lines interfere with  
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing  
the treble on your radio.  
3-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the  
antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make  
sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are not  
damaged. There is enough space between the grid lines  
to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering  
with radio reception.  
Backglass Antenna  
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window  
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that  
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched  
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged.  
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere  
with radio reception.  
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna  
System  
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to  
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear  
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.  
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.  
Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp  
objects.  
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the  
roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow  
and ice build up for clear radio reception.  
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the  
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.  
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting  
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting  
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming  
radio reception. Any damage caused to your  
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials  
will not be covered by your warranty.  
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere  
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure  
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.  
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window  
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger  
grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line  
must be repaired.  
3-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 4  
Driving Your Vehicle  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Drunk Driving  
Your Driving, the Road, and  
Your Vehicle  
{CAUTION:  
Defensive Driving  
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.  
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,  
and judgment can be affected by even a small  
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or  
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.  
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who  
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you  
are with a group, designate a driver who will  
not drink.  
Defensive driving means “always expect the  
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to  
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are  
for Everyone on page 1-10.  
{CAUTION:  
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,  
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be  
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what  
they might do and be ready. In addition:  
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is  
a global tragedy.  
Allow enough following distance between  
you and the driver in front of you.  
Focus on the task of driving.  
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive  
a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision,  
and attentiveness.  
Driver distraction can cause collisions  
resulting in injury or possible death. These  
simple defensive driving techniques could  
save your life.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor  
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,  
these deaths are the result of someone who was  
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than  
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been  
associated with the use of alcohol, with about  
250,000 people injured.  
Control of a Vehicle  
The following three systems help to control your vehicle  
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At  
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask  
more of those control systems than the tires and road can  
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.  
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 and  
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every  
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,  
psychological, and developmental reasons for  
these laws.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 5-3.  
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway  
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and  
then drive.  
Braking  
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s  
system can make crash injuries worse, especially  
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means  
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver  
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of  
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the  
person had not been drinking.  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-32.  
Braking action involves perception time and reaction  
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake  
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring  
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.  
But that is only an average. It might be less with one  
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with  
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination,  
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and  
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a  
vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet  
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,  
so keeping enough space between your vehicle and  
others is important.  
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,  
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,  
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the  
engine stops, you will still have some power brake  
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the  
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and  
the brake pedal will be harder to push.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 5-3.  
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly  
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement  
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is  
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;  
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force  
applied.  
Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),  
an advanced electronic braking system that will  
help prevent a braking skid.  
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive  
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy  
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a  
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between  
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster if you do  
a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic  
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a  
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking  
and longer brake life.  
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,  
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary  
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and  
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves  
a little. This is normal.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If there is a problem with  
ABS, this warning light will  
stay on. See Antilock  
Light on page 3-33.  
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to  
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease  
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle  
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes  
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave  
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you  
have ABS.  
Using ABS  
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.  
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam  
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what  
happens with ABS:  
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal  
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear  
the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the  
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.  
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If  
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer  
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.  
Braking in Emergencies  
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.  
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than  
even the very best braking.  
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any  
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the  
most of available tire and road conditions. This can  
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.  
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates  
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure  
accordingly.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When this light is on solid  
and either the SERVICE  
TRACTION or TRACTION  
OFF message is  
displayed, the system will  
not limit wheel spin.  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)  
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in  
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it  
senses that the front wheels are spinning too much  
or are beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the  
system works the front brakes and reduces engine  
power by closing the throttle and managing engine spark  
to limit wheel spin.  
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-46 for more information.  
This light will flash when  
your traction control  
system is limiting  
wheel spin.  
The Traction Control System is automatically enabled  
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel  
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should  
always leave the system enabled. You can turn TCS  
off if you ever need to.  
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal  
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn  
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,  
ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle  
to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off  
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions  
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle  
You may feel or hear the system working, but this  
is normal.  
If your vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to  
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically  
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely  
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.  
See Cruise Control on page 3-10.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To turn the system off or  
on, press and release this  
button located on the  
instrument panel.  
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.  
Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)  
excessively while these lights and this message  
are displayed.  
Notice: When traction control is turned off, it is  
possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with  
the front wheels spinning with a loss of traction,  
it is possible to cause damage to the transmission.  
Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels do  
not have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the  
vehicle is not covered. See your warranty book  
for additional information.  
The DIC will display the appropriate message as  
described previously when you press the button.  
Traction Control Operation  
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine  
power to the wheels (engine speed management)  
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel  
(brake-traction control) as necessary.  
The traction control system may activate on dry or  
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy  
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts  
of the transmission. When this happens, you may  
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise  
or vibration. This is normal.  
The traction control system is enabled automatically  
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate and flash  
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION  
message if it senses either of the front wheels are  
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. For  
more information on the LOW TRACTION message,  
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system  
activates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise  
control will automatically disengage. When road  
conditions allow you to use cruise control again,  
you may re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise  
Control on page 3-10.  
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle  
to spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and  
Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC  
and/or SERVICE TRACTION messages are  
displayed, you could damage the differential.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This light will flash on the  
instrument panel cluster  
when the ESC system  
is both on and activated.  
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)  
Your vehicle may have an Electronic Stability  
Control (ESC) system which combines antilock brake,  
traction and stability control systems and helps the  
driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in  
most driving conditions.  
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away,  
the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure  
there are no problems. You may hear or feel the system  
working. This is normal and does not mean there is a  
problem with your vehicle. The system should initialize  
before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).  
You may also feel or hear the system working; this  
is normal.  
When the light is on solid and either the SERVICE ESC  
or ESC OFF message is displayed, the system will  
not assist the driver in maintaining directional control of  
the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.  
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS  
light will be on solid, and the ESC OFF or SERVICE  
ESC message will be displayed.  
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is  
automatically enabled whenever you start your vehicle.  
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,  
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always  
leave the system on. But, you can turn ESC off if you  
ever need to.  
For more information, see Driver Information  
Center (DIC) on page 3-43.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system  
begins to assist the driver maintain directional control  
of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the  
cruise control will automatically disengage. When road  
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may  
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control  
on page 3-10.  
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal  
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn  
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,  
ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle  
to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off  
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions  
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle  
The ESC/TCS button  
is located on the  
center console.  
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that  
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and  
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light will  
be on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and  
requires service. If the problem does not clear after  
restarting the vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailer  
for service. See DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-46 for more information.  
The traction control system can be turned off or back on  
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both traction  
control and ESC, press and hold the button briefly.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.  
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION  
OFF and ESC OFF messages will appear, and  
the ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver  
that both traction control and ESC are disabled.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going  
in the same direction. If you have ever tried to steer  
a vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.  
Steering  
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the power  
steering assist system will continue to operate until you  
are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power steering  
assist because the electric power steering system is not  
functioning, you can steer, but it will take more effort.  
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the  
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at  
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you  
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.  
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several  
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the  
stopped position for an extended amount of time,  
you may notice a reduced amount of power steering  
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist  
should return shortly after a few normal steering  
movements.  
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.  
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control  
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do  
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding  
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those  
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control  
Control (ESC) on page 4-8.  
The electric power steering system does not require  
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system  
problems, contact your dealer/retailer for service repairs.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.  
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on  
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way  
you want it to go, and slow down.  
Steering Tips  
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should  
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds  
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under  
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.  
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.  
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned  
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:  
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach  
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the  
front wheels are straight ahead.  
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject  
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.  
The traction of the tires against the road surface  
makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path  
when you turn the front wheels.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the  
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait  
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then  
accelerate gently into the straightaway.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 5-3.  
Steering in Emergencies  
There are times when steering can be more effective  
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and  
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly  
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from  
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.  
You can avoid these problems by braking — if you  
can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is  
not room. That is the time for evasive action — steering  
around the problem.  
An emergency like this requires close attention and a  
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel  
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can  
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing  
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,  
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have  
avoided the object.  
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like  
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-3.  
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a  
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the  
left or right depending on the space available.  
The fact that such emergency situations are always  
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving  
at all times and wear safety belts properly.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Off-Road Recovery  
Passing  
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have  
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while  
you are driving.  
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be  
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,  
we suggest the following tips:  
Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads  
for situations that might affect a successful pass.  
If in doubt, wait.  
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and  
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.  
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side  
of the lane.  
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to  
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.  
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.  
When you are being passed, ease to the right.  
Loss of Control  
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the  
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the  
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,  
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of  
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up  
to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts  
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to  
go straight down the roadway.  
Let us review what driving experts say about what  
happens when the three control systems — brakes,  
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough  
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the  
driver has asked.  
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to  
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area  
of less danger.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,  
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,  
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to  
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery  
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and  
vehicle control more limited.  
Skidding  
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.  
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable  
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving  
those conditions. But skids are always possible.  
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s  
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are  
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much  
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose  
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much  
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.  
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your  
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,  
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower  
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to  
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until  
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning  
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on  
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down  
when you have any doubt.  
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot  
off the accelerator pedal.  
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid  
only the acceleration skid. If your traction control system  
is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled  
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.  
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps  
avoid only the braking skid.  
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want  
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,  
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready  
for a second skid if it occurs.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.  
Driving at Night  
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle  
clean — inside and out.  
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because  
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or  
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.  
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns  
or curves.  
Night driving tips include:  
Drive defensively.  
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.  
But, as we get older, these differences increase.  
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much  
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.  
Do not drink and drive.  
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside  
rearview mirror.  
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads  
Slow down and keep more space between you  
and other vehicles because your headlamps  
can only light up so much road ahead.  
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction  
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always  
drive slower in these types of driving conditions  
and avoid driving through large puddles and  
deep-standing or flowing water.  
Watch for animals.  
When tired, pull off the road.  
Do not wear sunglasses.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hydroplaning  
{CAUTION:  
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up  
under your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the  
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough  
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is  
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.  
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not  
work as well in a quick stop and could cause  
pulling to one side. You could lose control of  
the vehicle.  
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.  
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.  
After driving through a large puddle of water  
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake  
pedal until the brakes work normally.  
Other Rainy Weather Tips  
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips  
include:  
Flowing or rushing water creates strong  
forces. Driving through flowing water could  
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this  
happens, you and other vehicle occupants  
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings  
and be very cautious about trying to drive  
through flowing water.  
Allow extra following distance.  
Pass with caution.  
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.  
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.  
Have good tires with proper tread depth.  
See Tires on page 5-46.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Leaving on a Long Trip  
Highway Hypnosis  
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having  
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.  
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings  
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a  
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.  
Things to check on your own include:  
Other driving tips include:  
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?  
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.  
Keep interior temperature cool.  
Windows clean — inside and outside?  
Wiper Blades: In good shape?  
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?  
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?  
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead  
and to the sides.  
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle  
instruments often.  
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to  
recommended pressure?  
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?  
Hill and Mountain Roads  
Have up-to-date maps?  
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different  
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving  
in these conditions include:  
Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.  
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling  
system, and transmission.  
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a  
lower gear.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut  
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds  
that let you stay in your own lane.  
{CAUTION:  
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your  
lane (stalled car, accident).  
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get  
so hot that they would not work well. You  
would then have poor braking or even none  
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down  
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep  
downhill slope.  
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks  
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or  
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.  
Winter Driving  
Here are some tips for winter driving:  
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.  
{CAUTION:  
You might want to put winter emergency supplies  
in your trunk.  
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the  
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have  
to do all the work of slowing down and they  
could get so hot that they would not work well.  
You would then have poor braking or even  
none going down a hill. You could crash.  
Always have the engine running and your  
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.  
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a  
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter  
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red  
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles.  
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,  
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,  
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.  
Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.  
Also see Tires on page 5-46.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can get wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C),  
and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on  
wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.  
Driving on Snow or Ice  
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the  
road probably have good traction.  
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,  
or loose snow — drive with caution.  
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and the  
road, you can have a very slippery situation. You have a  
lot less traction, or grip, and need to be very careful.  
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), it will  
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on  
a slippery road. But you can turn the TCS off if you  
ever need to. You should turn the TCS off if your  
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.  
on page 4-21. Even if you have TCS, slow down and  
adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under certain  
conditions, you might want to turn the TCS off, such  
as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel,  
to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.  
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 and  
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice.  
Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to  
drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble  
because it can offer the least traction of all.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your  
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a  
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin  
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.  
See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4.  
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard  
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in  
a serious situation. You should probably stay with your  
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near  
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some  
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and  
your passengers safe:  
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.  
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine  
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an  
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in  
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as  
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under  
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an  
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads  
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,  
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while  
you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden  
steering maneuvers.  
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.  
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that  
you have been stopped by the snow.  
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.  
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make  
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,  
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around  
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your  
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon  
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could  
overcome you and kill you. You cannot  
see it or smell it, so you might not know it  
is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from  
around the base of your vehicle, especially  
any that is blocking the exhaust pipe. And  
check around again from time to time to be  
sure snow does not collect there.  
Open a window just a little on the side of  
the vehicle that is away from the wind.  
This will help keep CO out.  
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves  
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little  
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator  
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get  
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a  
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly  
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the  
heater run for a while.  
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,  
Mud, Ice, or Snow  
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your  
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See  
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help  
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction  
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too  
severe for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn  
the traction system off and use the rocking method.  
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost  
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine  
again and repeat this only when you feel really  
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as  
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.  
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle  
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour  
or so until help comes.  
{CAUTION:  
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high  
speed, they can explode, and you or others  
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,  
causing an engine compartment fire or other  
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible  
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as  
shown on the speedometer.  
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,  
see Tire Chains on page 5-66.  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out  
Loading Your Vehicle  
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear  
the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction  
or stability system. See Traction Control System (TCS)  
on page 4-8. Then shift back and forth between  
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels  
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear,  
wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting  
gears. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift,  
and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when  
the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the  
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will  
cause a rocking motion that could free your vehicle.  
If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries,  
it might need to be towed out. If your vehicle does  
need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle  
on page 4-27.  
It is very important to know how much weight  
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the  
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of  
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed  
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how  
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and  
Loading Information label and the Vehicle  
Certification label.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),  
or either the maximum front or rear Gross  
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,  
parts on your vehicle can break, and it  
can change the way your vehicle handles.  
These could cause you to lose control  
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten  
the life of your vehicle.  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists  
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and  
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).  
For more information on tires and inflation, see  
on page 5-52.  
Tire and Loading Information Label  
There is also important loading information on the  
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight  
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see  
“Certification Label” later in this section.  
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight  
of occupants and cargo should never exceed  
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s  
placard.  
Label Example  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers that will be riding in your  
vehicle.  
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information  
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar  
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find  
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).  
The Tire and Loading Information label lists the  
number of occupant seating positions (A), and  
the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in  
kilograms and pounds.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.  
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals  
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb  
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
is 650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That  
weight may not safely exceed the available  
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated  
in Step 4.  
Example 1  
Description  
Maximum Vehicle  
Capacity Weight for  
Example 1 =  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load  
from your trailer will be transferred to your  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how  
this reduces the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity for your vehicle.  
Item  
Total  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
A
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 150 lbs  
(68 kg) × 2 =  
Available Occupant  
and Cargo Weight =  
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to  
tow a trailer.  
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)  
700 lbs (317 kg)  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 2  
Description  
Example 3  
Description  
Item  
Total  
Item  
Total  
Maximum Vehicle  
Capacity Weight for  
Example 2 =  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 150 lbs  
(68 kg) × 5 =  
Maximum Vehicle  
Capacity Weight for  
Example 3 =  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 200 lbs  
(91 kg) × 5 =  
1,000 lbs  
1,000 lbs  
A
A
(453 kg)  
(453 kg)  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)  
250 lbs (113 kg)  
B
C
Available Cargo  
Weight =  
Available Cargo  
Weight =  
0 lbs (0 kg)  
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information  
label for specific information about your vehicle’s  
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating  
positions. The combined weight of the driver,  
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your  
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Certification Label  
{CAUTION:  
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),  
or either the maximum front or rear Gross  
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,  
parts on your vehicle can break, and it  
can change the way your vehicle handles.  
These could cause you to lose control  
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten  
the life of your vehicle.  
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause  
damage. Repairs would not be covered by  
your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.  
A vehicle specific Certification label is found  
on the rear edge of the driver’s door.  
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or  
anything else are put inside the vehicle, they will  
go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to  
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they  
will keep going.  
The label shows the gross weight capacity of  
your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight  
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight  
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.  
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or  
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for  
either the front or rear axle.  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Towing  
{CAUTION:  
Towing Your Vehicle  
Things you put inside your vehicle can  
strike and injure people in a sudden stop  
or turn, or in a crash.  
Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.  
In a trunk, put them as far forward  
as you can. Try to spread the weight  
evenly.  
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing  
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.  
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.  
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle  
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),  
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.  
Never stack heavier things, like  
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that  
some of them are above the tops  
of the seats.  
Do not leave an unsecured child  
restraint in your vehicle.  
When you carry something inside the  
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.  
Do not leave a seat folded down  
unless you need to.  
Recreational Vehicle Towing  
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle  
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.  
The two most common types of recreational vehicle  
towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle  
with all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,  
towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and  
two wheels up on a device known as a dolly.  
With the proper preparation and equipment, many  
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy  
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are some important things to consider before you  
do recreational vehicle towing:  
What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?  
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s  
recommendations.  
How far will you tow? Some vehicles have  
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.  
Do you have the proper towing equipment?  
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for  
additional advice and equipment recommendations.  
Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you  
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you  
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to  
on page 4-16.  
You may dinghy tow your vehicle from the front following  
these steps:  
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.  
2. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.  
3. Set the parking brake.  
Dinghy Towing  
When dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at the  
beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for  
about five minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication of  
transmission components.  
4. To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle  
is being towed, remove the following fuse from the  
instrument panel fuse block: (IGN SENSOR). See  
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-87 for more  
information.  
5. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY.  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N).  
7. Release the parking brake.  
Dolly Towing  
To tow your vehicle with two wheels on the ground  
and a dolly:  
Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse once you  
have reached your destination.  
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while  
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never  
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.  
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.  
2. Put the gear shift lever in PARK (P).  
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the  
ignition key.  
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead  
position.  
5. Release the parking brake.  
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could  
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by  
the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed  
from the rear.  
Towing a Trailer  
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to  
tow a trailer.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories and Modifications  
Service  
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to  
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance  
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,  
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,  
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like  
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.  
Some of these accessories could even cause  
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.  
You will receive genuine Saturn parts and Saturn-trained  
and supported service people.  
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.  
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.  
GM Accessories are designed to complement and  
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your  
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle  
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your  
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories,  
you will know that GM-trained and supported service  
technicians will perform the work using genuine  
GM Accessories.  
Vehicle on page 1-68.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
California Proposition 65 Warning  
Doing Your Own Service Work  
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or  
emit chemicals known to the State of California to  
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive  
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems  
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids,  
and some component wear by-products contain  
and/or emit these chemicals.  
{CAUTION:  
Never try to do your own service on hybrid  
components. You can be injured and your  
vehicle can be damaged if you try to do your  
own service work. Service and repair of these  
hybrid components should only be performed  
by a trained service technician with the proper  
knowledge and tools.  
California Perchlorate Materials  
Requirements  
Certain types of automotive applications, such as  
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium  
batteries contained in remote keyless entry transmitters,  
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling  
may be necessary. For additional information, see  
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting  
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.  
{CAUTION:  
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and  
list the mileage and the date of any service work  
you perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14.  
You can be injured and your vehicle could be  
damaged if you try to do service work on a  
vehicle without knowing enough about it.  
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,  
experience, the proper replacement parts,  
and tools before you attempt any vehicle  
maintenance task.  
Adding Equipment to the Outside  
of Your Vehicle  
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle  
can affect the airflow around it. This can cause  
wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield  
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer  
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.  
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,  
and other fasteners. English and metric  
fasteners can be easily confused. If you  
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later  
break or fall off. You could be hurt.  
If you want to do some of your own service work, you  
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much  
more about how to service your vehicle than this  
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Gasoline Specifications  
Fuel  
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM  
specification D 4814 in the United States or  
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines  
contain an octane-enhancing additive called  
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).  
We recommend against the use of gasolines  
containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7 for  
additional information.  
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part  
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help  
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle  
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline  
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.  
Gasoline Octane  
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane  
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,  
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you  
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this  
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as  
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at  
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,  
the engine needs service.  
California Fuel  
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions  
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that  
meet California specifications. See the underhood  
emission control label. If this fuel is not available  
in states adopting California emissions standards,  
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting  
federal specifications, but emission control system  
performance might be affected. The malfunction  
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail  
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
on page 3-36. If this occurs, return to your authorized  
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that  
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,  
repairs might not be covered by your warranty.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel  
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing  
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel  
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.  
That damage would not be covered under your  
warranty.  
Additives  
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States  
are now required to contain additives that help prevent  
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing  
the emission control system to work properly. In most  
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.  
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum  
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental  
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors  
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences  
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline  
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.  
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help  
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.  
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for  
low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing  
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese  
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you  
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.  
We recommend against the use of such gasolines.  
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark  
plugs and the performance of the emission control  
system could be affected. The malfunction indicator  
lamp might turn on. If this occurs, return to your  
dealer/retailer for service.  
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and  
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in  
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,  
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.  
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing  
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles  
that were not designed for those fuels.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuels in Foreign Countries  
Filling the Tank  
If you plan on driving in another country outside the  
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be  
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other  
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.  
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would  
not be covered by your warranty.  
{CAUTION:  
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire  
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries  
to you and others, read and follow all the  
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your  
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke  
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.  
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,  
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.  
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when  
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law  
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle  
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from  
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.  
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,  
or contact a major oil company that does business  
in the country where you will be driving.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The fuel door is located on the passenger side of the  
vehicle.  
To open the fuel door, apply pressure on the center of  
the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.  
To remove the tethered fuel cap, turn it slowly  
counterclockwise.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the  
hook on the fuel door.  
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),  
the CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the  
fuel cap is not properly installed.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the  
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then  
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.  
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,  
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel  
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.  
Then unscrew the cap all the way.  
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not  
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel  
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the  
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.  
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to  
get the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get  
one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not  
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction  
indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel  
tank and emissions system. See Malfunction  
Indicator Lamp on page 3-36.  
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the  
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished  
pumping the fuel before removing the nozzle. Clean  
fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible.  
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-80.  
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the clockwise  
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.  
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel  
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This  
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.  
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-36.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Filling a Portable Fuel Container  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the  
inside of the fill opening before operating  
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained  
until the filling is complete.  
{CAUTION:  
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is  
in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge  
from the container can ignite the fuel vapor.  
You can be badly burned and your vehicle  
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury  
to you and others:  
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.  
Do not use a cellular phone while  
pumping fuel.  
Dispense fuel only into approved  
containers.  
Do not fill a container while it is inside a  
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,  
or on any surface other than the ground.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking Things Under  
the Hood  
{CAUTION:  
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts  
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,  
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer  
and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or  
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop  
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.  
{CAUTION:  
An electric fan under the hood can start up  
and injure you even when the engine is not  
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools  
away from any underhood electric fan.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hood Release  
To open the hood, do the following:  
1. Pull the hood release  
handle with this symbol  
on it. It is located  
inside the vehicle  
to the left of the  
steering column.  
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the  
secondary hood release handle toward the driver  
side of the vehicle.  
3. Lift the hood.  
4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continue to  
open to the full position. Before closing the hood,  
be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lower the  
hood until the lifting force of the strut is reduced,  
then release the hood to latch fully. Check to make  
sure the hood is closed and repeat the process  
if necessary.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Compartment Overview  
When you open the hood, this is what you see:  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air  
Engine Oil  
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.  
B. Cooling Fans. See Cooling System on page 5-28.  
Checking Engine Oil  
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under  
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you  
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil  
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.  
Engine Oil on page 5-15.  
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”  
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.  
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See  
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for  
the location of the engine oil dipstick.  
E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant  
on page 5-22.  
F. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Brake Fluid″  
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes  
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,  
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.  
under Brakes on page 5-33.  
G. Battery. See Battery on page 5-34.  
H. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine  
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or  
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it  
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.  
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-89.  
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding  
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid  
on page 5-32.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview on page 5-14  
for the location of the  
engine oil fill cap.  
When to Add Engine Oil  
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add at least  
one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section  
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase  
page 5-95.  
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere  
in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all  
the way back in when you are through.  
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine  
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the  
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,  
the engine could be damaged.  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
These numbers on an oil container show its  
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity  
oils such as SAE 20W-50.  
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use  
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol  
Oils meeting these  
requirements should have  
the starburst symbol on  
the container. This symbol  
indicates that the oil  
has been certified by the  
American Petroleum  
Institute (API).  
Look for this information on the oil container, and  
use only those oils that are identified as meeting  
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol  
on the front of the oil container.  
Look for three things:  
GM6094M  
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting  
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American  
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines  
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended  
oil can result in engine damage not covered by  
your warranty.  
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting  
GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use  
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.  
SAE 5W-30  
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30  
is best for your vehicle.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the  
temperature falls below 20°F (29°C), it is  
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30  
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier  
cold starting and better protection for the engine at  
extremely low temperatures.  
When the system has calculated that oil life has  
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change  
is necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will  
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-46. Change the oil as soon as possible within  
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,  
if you are driving under the best conditions, the  
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change  
is necessary for over a year. However, the engine  
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year  
and at this time the system must be reset. Your  
dealer/retailer has trained service people who will  
perform this work using genuine parts and reset the  
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly  
and keep it at the proper level.  
Engine Oil Additives  
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended  
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard  
GM6094M are all you need for good performance  
and engine protection.  
Engine Oil Life System  
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must  
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your  
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system  
whenever the oil is changed.  
When to Change Engine Oil  
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know  
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based  
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not  
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage  
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary  
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,  
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life  
System  
What to Do with Used Oil  
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be  
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.  
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean  
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good  
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or  
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s  
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.  
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to  
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.  
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so  
it can calculate when the next oil change is required.  
If a situation occurs where you change the oil prior  
to a CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on,  
reset the system.  
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you  
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from  
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting  
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,  
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by  
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have  
a problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your  
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling  
center for help.  
After changing the engine oil and filter, the system  
must be reset. To reset the oil life system:  
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the  
engine off.  
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three  
times within five seconds.  
If the message is not displayed, the system is reset.  
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back  
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system  
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,  
do the following:  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for  
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.  
When to Inspect the Engine  
Air Cleaner/Filter  
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II  
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after  
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.  
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect  
the filter at each engine oil change.  
How to Inspect the Engine  
Air Cleaner/Filter  
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter  
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release  
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,  
a new filter is required.  
1. Remove the spring clamps that hold the cover on.  
2. Lift off the cover.  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter  
off can cause you or others to be burned.  
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps  
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is  
not there and the engine backfires, you could  
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be  
careful working on the engine with the air  
cleaner/filter off.  
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire  
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can  
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.  
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when  
you are driving.  
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.  
4. Align the filter correctly using the alignment tab.  
5. Install the cover by guiding the tabs on the rim  
of the top cover into the bottom hinges and turn  
the cover down to close it.  
6. The spring clips will engage easily, if the cover  
is properly seated.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following explains your cooling system and how  
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem  
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating  
on page 5-26.  
Automatic Transmission Fluid  
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.  
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid  
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the  
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL® coolant will:  
dealer/retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.  
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in  
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure  
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.  
Give freezing protection down to 34°F (37°C).  
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).  
Protect against rust and corrosion.  
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission  
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages  
may not be covered by your warranty. Always  
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in  
Help keep the proper engine temperature.  
Let the warning lights and gages work  
as they should.  
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may  
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator  
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may  
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance  
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or  
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs  
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use  
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.  
Engine Coolant  
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with  
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed  
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles  
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only  
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,  
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.  
The repair cost would not be covered by your  
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze  
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and  
other parts.  
What to Use  
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and  
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage  
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you  
do not need to add anything else.  
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,  
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.  
{CAUTION:  
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives  
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could  
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture  
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for  
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.  
Adding only plain water to your cooling  
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or  
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil  
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your  
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the  
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the  
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot  
but you would not get the overheat warning.  
Your engine could catch fire and you or others  
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,  
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for  
more information on location.  
Checking Coolant  
{CAUTION:  
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the  
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam  
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn  
you badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure  
cap — even a little — when the engine and  
radiator are hot.  
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your  
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the  
FULL COLD mark or slightly higher.  
The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rear  
of the engine compartment.  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Coolant  
Pressure Cap  
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®  
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the  
engine is cool. If the surge tank is empty, a special fill  
procedure is necessary. See Engine Overheating  
on page 5-26 and Cooling System on page 5-28.  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,  
coolant loss and possible engine damage may  
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly  
secured.  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for  
more information on location.  
{CAUTION:  
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap  
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,  
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,  
coolant loss and possible engine damage may  
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly  
secured.  
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully  
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine  
Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more  
information on location.  
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is  
hand-tight and fully seated.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Overheating  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
There is an engine coolant temperature warning light on  
your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant  
Temperature Warning Light on page 3-35 for more  
information.  
If you keep driving when your engine is  
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.  
You or others could be badly burned. Stop  
your engine if it overheats, and get out of  
the vehicle until the engine is cool.  
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine  
{CAUTION:  
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you  
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can  
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty.  
Steam from an overheated engine can burn  
you badly, even if you just open the hood.  
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear  
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and  
get everyone away from the vehicle until it  
cools down. Wait until there is no sign of  
steam or coolant before you open the hood.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the overheat warning is no longer on, you can drive.  
Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.  
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive  
normally.  
If No Steam Is Coming From  
Your Engine  
An overheat warning, can indicate a serious problem.  
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your  
vehicle right away.  
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or  
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.  
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:  
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for  
three minutes parked. If the warning is still there,  
turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle  
until it cools down.  
Climb a long hill on a hot day.  
Stop after high-speed driving.  
Idle for long periods in traffic.  
Tow a trailer.  
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service  
help right away.  
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,  
try this for a minute or so:  
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)  
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,  
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the  
engine idle.  
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan  
speed and open the windows as necessary.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cooling System  
{CAUTION:  
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what  
you will see:  
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood  
can start up even when the engine is not  
running and can injure you. Keep hands,  
clothing, and tools away from any underhood  
electric fan.  
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,  
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle  
should be parked on a level surface.  
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD  
mark on the front of the coolant surge tank. If it is not,  
you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the  
radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,  
or somewhere else in the cooling system.  
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans  
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank  
C. Pressure Cap  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may  
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator  
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could  
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)  
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs  
would not be covered by the warranty. Always  
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.  
{CAUTION:  
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine  
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.  
If you do, you can be burned.  
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant  
Surge Tank  
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you  
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That  
could cause an engine fire, and you could  
be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive  
the vehicle.  
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill  
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could  
cause your engine to overheat and be severely  
damaged.  
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check  
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.  
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be  
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.  
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if  
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible  
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD  
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water  
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,  
but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant  
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.  
See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for more information.  
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine  
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant  
as follows:  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Adding only plain water to the cooling system  
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other  
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the  
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s  
coolant warning system is set for the proper  
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong  
mixture, the engine could get too hot but  
you would not get the overheat warning. The  
engine could catch fire and you or others  
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,  
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.  
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling  
system can blow out and burn you badly. They  
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant  
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they  
can come out at high speed. Never turn the  
cap when the cooling system, including the  
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait  
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank  
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn  
the pressure cap.  
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack  
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.  
Use the recommended coolant and the proper  
coolant mixture.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol  
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.  
1. Remove the coolant  
surge tank pressure  
cap when the cooling  
system, including  
the coolant surge tank  
pressure cap and  
upper radiator hose,  
is no longer hot.  
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,  
and remove it.  
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise  
about two or two and one-half turns. If you hear a  
hiss, wait for that to stop. This allows any pressure  
still left to be vented out the discharge hose.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture, to  
the FULL COLD mark on the front of the surge tank.  
Wait about five minutes, then check to see if the level  
is below the FULL COLD mark. If the level is below  
the FULL COLD mark, add additional coolant to bring  
the level up to the mark. Repeat this procedure until  
the level remains constant at the FULL COLD mark  
for at least five minutes.  
Windshield Washer Fluid  
What to Use  
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to  
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you  
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the  
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that  
has sufficient protection against freezing.  
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start  
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper  
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the  
engine cooling fans.  
Adding Washer Fluid  
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,  
a LOW WASHER FLUID message displays on  
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-46 for more information.  
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant  
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than  
the FULL COLD mark, add more of the proper  
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level  
reaches the FULL COLD mark.  
Open the cap with the  
washer symbol on it.  
Add washer fluid until the  
tank is full. See Engine  
on page 5-14 for reservoir  
location.  
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the  
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.  
See your dealer/retailer, if necessary.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice:  
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the  
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.  
Water can cause the solution to freeze and  
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of  
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as  
well as washer fluid.  
The brake wear warning sound means that soon  
the brakes will not work well. That could lead  
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear  
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.  
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full  
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid  
expansion if freezing occurs, which could  
damage the tank if it is completely full.  
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake  
pads could result in costly brake repair.  
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a  
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or  
lightly applied. This does not mean something is  
wrong with the brakes.  
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your  
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s  
windshield washer system and paint.  
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help  
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,  
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel  
nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications  
Brakes  
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have  
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning  
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads  
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard  
all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are  
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.  
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete  
axle sets.  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Brake Pedal Travel  
Battery  
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not  
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase  
in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service  
might be required.  
{CAUTION:  
Brake Adjustment  
Batteries have acid that can burn you and  
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt  
if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on  
page 5-36 for tips on working around a battery  
without getting hurt.  
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the  
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.  
Replacing Brake System Parts  
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many  
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if  
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle  
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.  
When you replace parts of the braking system — for  
example, when the brake linings wear down and you  
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved  
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not  
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake  
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance  
between the front and rear brakes can change — for  
the worse. The braking performance you have come  
to expect can change in many other ways if someone  
puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.  
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related  
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,  
chemicals known to the State of California to cause  
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after  
handling.  
Your vehicle has a standard 12-volt battery and a  
36-volt hybrid battery system.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remember to reconnect the battery when you are  
ready to drive your vehicle.  
12-Volt Battery  
When it is time for a new standard 12-volt battery, see  
your dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement  
number shown on the original battery’s label.  
Notice: The 36-volt hybrid battery system should  
be serviced only by a qualified facility to avoid  
battery system damage. See your dealer/retailer  
if service is needed.  
36-Volt Battery System  
Notice: If the vehicle is not driven for over  
two months, the 36-volt hybrid battery can be  
permanently damaged.  
If you need a new 36-volt hybrid battery system,  
see your dealer/retailer.  
Vehicle Storage  
The 36-volt battery is located behind the rear seat,  
in the trunk. If the vehicle is stored for an extended  
period of time, drive the vehicle every two months for  
about half an hour to keep the 36-volt hybrid battery  
charged and in good working condition.  
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,  
remove the 12-volt battery black, negative () cable,  
the one that is exposed. This will help keep the battery  
from running down.  
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your  
vehicle, remove the 12-volt battery black, negative ()  
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.  
This will help maintain the charge of the battery over  
an extended period of time.  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly  
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered  
by your warranty.  
Jump Starting  
If your battery has run down, you may want to use  
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your  
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.  
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it  
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.  
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt  
battery with a negative ground system.  
{CAUTION:  
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt  
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can  
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems  
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.  
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous  
because:  
They contain acid that can burn you.  
They contain gas that can explode  
or ignite.  
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables  
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching  
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground  
connection you do not want. You would not be  
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding  
could damage the electrical systems.  
They contain enough electricity to  
burn you.  
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some  
or all of these things can hurt you.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set  
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved  
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic  
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission  
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.  
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the  
positive (+) and negative () terminal locations on  
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is  
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.  
The negative (–) terminal is located under a  
black tethered cap on the battery. See Engine  
Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more  
information on location. Flip the caps up to access  
the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals.  
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories  
on during the jump starting procedure, they could  
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered  
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and  
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.  
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug  
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette  
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off  
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This  
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.  
And it could save the radio!  
{CAUTION:  
An electric fan can start up even when the  
engine is not running and can injure you.  
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any  
underhood electric fan.  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Using a match near a battery can cause battery  
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing  
this, and some have been blinded. Use a  
flashlight if you need more light.  
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure  
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving  
parts once the engine is running.  
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do  
not need to add water to the battery installed  
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler  
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.  
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.  
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.  
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose  
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a  
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.  
Before you connect the cables, here are some  
things you should know. Positive (+) will go  
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal  
if the vehicle has one. Negative () will go to a  
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote  
negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.  
Do not connect positive (+) to negative () or you  
will get a short that would damage the battery  
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the  
negative () cable to the negative () terminal on  
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.  
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.  
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it  
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place  
with water and get medical help immediately.  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)  
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote  
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.  
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to  
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a  
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.  
8. Now connect the black negative () cable to the  
negative () terminal of the good battery. Use a  
remote negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.  
Do not let the other end touch anything until the  
next step. The other end of the negative () cable  
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a  
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote  
negative () terminal on the vehicle with the  
dead battery.  
9. Connect the other end of the negative () cable at  
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,  
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical  
connection is just as good there, and the chance  
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run  
the engine for a while.  
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.  
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs  
service.  
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or  
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may  
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would  
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect  
and remove the jumper cables in the correct  
order, making sure that the cables do not touch  
each other or other metal.  
Jumper Cable Removal  
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote  
Negative (–) Terminal  
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote  
Negative (–) Terminals  
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,  
do the following:  
Headlamp Aiming  
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and  
should need no further adjustment.  
1. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the  
vehicle that had the dead battery.  
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash,  
the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment  
to the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if  
oncoming drivers flash their high-beam headlamps  
at you (for vertical aim).  
2. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the  
other vehicle.  
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is  
recommended that you take the vehicle to your  
dealer/retailer for service.  
5. Return the caps over the positive (+) and  
negative (–) terminals to their original positions.  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,  
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps  
Bulb Replacement  
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see  
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-44.  
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in  
this section, contact your dealer/retailer.  
Halogen Bulbs  
{CAUTION:  
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and  
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You  
or others could be injured. Be sure to read and  
follow the instructions on the bulb package.  
A. Turn Signal Lamp  
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp  
C. Backup Lamp  
D. Sidemarker Lamp  
If a stoplamp or a taillamp needs to be replaced,  
see your dealer/retailer.  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To replace a sidemarker lamp, turn signal lamp,  
or a back-up lamp:  
5. Remove the taillamp assembly.  
6. Remove the wiring harness from the taillamp  
assembly by lifting the release tab.  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-10 for  
more information.  
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.  
8. Pull the bulb from the socket.  
2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle  
has one.  
9. Install a new bulb.  
3. Remove the wing nuts holding the trunk trim.  
10. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to reinstall the taillamp  
assembly.  
4. Remove the three wing nuts, which hold the  
taillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull  
the bulb straight out of the socket.  
License Plate Lamp  
To replace the license plate lamp bulb:  
4. Install the new bulb.  
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the lamp  
assembly.  
Replacement Bulbs  
Exterior Lamp  
Back-up Lamp  
Bulb Number  
921  
License Plate Lamp and  
Rear Sidemarker Lamp  
168  
Turn Signal Lamp  
3156  
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your  
dealer/retailer.  
1. Remove the two screws holding the license plate  
lamp assembly to the fascia.  
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward  
through the fascia opening.  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Windshield Wiper Blade  
Replacement  
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for  
wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance  
on page 6-4 for more information on wiper blade  
inspection.  
To remove the wiper blade:  
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector  
away from the windshield.  
2. Push the release button.  
3. Slide the blade forward.  
4. Rotate the blade toward you and continue  
to slide forward.  
5. Install the new blade onto the arm connector  
and make sure the grooved areas are fully set  
in the locked position.  
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance  
Replacement Parts on page 6-13.  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires  
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever  
have questions about your tire warranty and where  
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty  
booklet for details.  
Underinflated tires pose the same  
danger as overloaded tires. The  
resulting accident could cause serious  
injury. Check all tires frequently to  
maintain the recommended pressure.  
Tire pressure should be checked  
when your vehicle’s tires are cold. See  
{CAUTION:  
Poorly maintained and improperly used  
tires are dangerous.  
Overloading your vehicle’s tires can  
cause overheating as a result of too  
much flexing. You could have an  
air-out and a serious accident. See  
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.  
Overinflated tires are more likely to  
be cut, punctured, or broken by a  
sudden impact — such as when  
you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the  
recommended pressure.  
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.  
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or  
if your vehicle’s tires have been  
damaged, replace them.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination  
of letters and numbers used to define a particular  
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction  
type, and service description. See the Tire Size  
illustration later in this section for more detail.  
Tire Sidewall Labeling  
Useful information about a tire is molded into the  
sidewall. The following illustration is an example  
of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.  
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed  
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have  
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.  
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all  
federal safety guidelines.  
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):  
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code  
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the  
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards.  
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters  
and numbers following the DOT code are the  
Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows  
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,  
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is  
molded onto both sides of the tire, although  
only one side may have the date of manufacture.  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and  
number of plies in the sidewall and under  
the tread.  
Tire Size  
The following illustration shows, an example of,  
a typical passenger car tire size.  
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):  
Tire manufacturers are required to grade  
tires based on three performance factors:  
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.  
For more information, see Uniform Tire Quality  
Grading on page 5-62.  
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:  
Maximum load that can be carried and the  
maximum pressure needed to support that load.  
For information on recommended tire pressure  
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52  
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.  
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States  
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P  
as the first character in the tire size means a  
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards  
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.  
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates  
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall  
to sidewall.  
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that  
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.  
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75,  
as shown in item C, of the illustration, it would  
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75 percent as high  
as it is wide.  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used  
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.  
The letter R means radial ply construction; the  
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;  
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.  
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is  
located between the plies and the tread.  
Cords may be made from steel or other  
reinforcing materials.  
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped  
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.  
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in  
inches.  
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies  
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees  
to the centerline of the tread.  
(F) Service Description: The service description  
indicates the load range and speed rating of a  
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.  
Speed ratings range from A to Z.  
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure  
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch  
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up  
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure  
on page 5-52.  
Tire Terminology and Definitions  
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the  
tire pressing outward on each square inch of  
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds  
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).  
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle  
with standard and optional equipment including  
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,  
but without passengers and cargo.  
Accessory Weight: This means the combined  
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of  
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,  
power steering, power brakes, power windows,  
power seats, and air conditioning.  
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall  
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance  
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)  
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code  
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),  
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify  
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,  
and date of production.  
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height  
to its width.  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.  
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of  
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity  
weight, and production options weight.  
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.  
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the  
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.  
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of  
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied  
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle  
on page 4-22.  
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear  
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.  
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of  
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face  
outward when mounted on a vehicle.  
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating  
positions.  
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that  
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.  
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,  
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,  
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher  
or deeper than the same moldings on the  
other sidewall of the tire.  
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.  
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger  
vehicles.  
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from  
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying  
capacity of a tire.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and  
multipurpose vehicles.  
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum  
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.  
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the  
sidewall.  
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle  
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation  
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See  
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52 and  
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.  
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire  
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure  
for that tire.  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the  
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at  
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.  
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
Standards): A tire information system that  
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s  
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings  
are determined by tire manufacturers using  
government testing procedures. The ratings  
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See  
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which  
the tire beads are seated.  
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread  
and the bead.  
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of  
designated seating positions multiplied by  
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.  
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.  
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to  
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a  
tire can operate.  
Traction: The friction between the tire and the  
road surface. The amount of grip provided.  
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on  
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory  
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.  
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into  
contact with the road.  
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached  
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity  
weight and the original equipment tire size and  
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire  
and Loading Information Label” under Loading  
Your Vehicle on page 4-22.  
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes  
called wear bars, that show across the tread of  
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread  
on page 5-59.  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information  
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows  
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the  
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they  
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation  
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum  
amount of air pressure needed to support  
Inflation - Tire Pressure  
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to  
operate effectively.  
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that  
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.  
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air  
(under-inflation), you can get the following:  
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.  
For additional information regarding how much  
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example  
of the Tire and Loading Information label,  
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22. How  
you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling  
and ride comfort. Never load your vehicle  
with more weight than it was designed to carry.  
Too much flexing  
Too much heat  
Tire overloading  
Premature or irregular wear  
Poor handling  
Reduced fuel economy  
When to Check  
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),  
you can get the following:  
Unusual wear  
Check your tires once a month or more.  
How to Check  
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check  
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are  
properly inflated simply by looking at them.  
Radial tires may look properly inflated even when  
they are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation  
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your  
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours  
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
Poor handling  
Rough ride  
Needless damage from road hazards  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be  
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation  
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer  
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.  
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the  
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation  
pressure label, you should determine the proper  
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)  
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.  
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to  
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire  
inflation pressure matches the recommended  
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information  
label, no further adjustment is necessary.  
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you  
reach the recommended amount.  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been  
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)  
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one  
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.  
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on  
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.  
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.  
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve  
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out  
dirt and moisture.  
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale  
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as  
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper  
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire  
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.  
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire  
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling  
and stopping ability.  
Tire Pressure Monitor System  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio  
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.  
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in  
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings  
to a receiver located in the vehicle.  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper  
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to  
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation  
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of  
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS  
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is  
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator  
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When  
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will  
flash for approximately one minute and then remain  
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue  
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the  
malfunction exists.  
Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) and Industry  
and Science Canada  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates  
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of  
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the  
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire  
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur  
for a variety of reasons, including the installation  
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle  
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.  
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after  
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle  
to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires  
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function  
properly.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates  
on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210  
of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject  
to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-55, for  
additional information.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For additional information and details about the DIC  
operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays  
on page 3-44 and DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-46.  
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed  
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition  
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and  
wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the  
air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire  
pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.  
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in  
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then  
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early  
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting  
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.  
When a low tire pressure  
condition is detected, the  
TPMS turns on the low  
tire pressure warning light  
located on the instrument  
panel cluster.  
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of  
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct  
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are  
cold. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22, for an  
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and  
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire  
Pressure on page 5-52.  
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low  
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal  
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation  
on page 5-58 and Tires on page 5-46.  
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could  
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)  
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using  
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the  
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire  
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.  
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a  
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center  
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light  
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition  
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation  
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can  
be viewed by the driver.  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities  
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS  
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.  
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message  
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the  
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the  
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light  
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the  
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message is  
also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC warning  
message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem  
is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause the  
malfunction light and DIC message to come on are:  
The TPMS sensor matching process was started but  
not completed or not completed successfully after  
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and  
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS  
sensor matching process is performed successfully.  
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this  
section.  
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or  
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS  
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS  
sensors are installed and the sensor matching  
process is performed successfully. See your  
dealer/retailer for service.  
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your  
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires  
and wheels other than those recommended for your  
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning  
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-60.  
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or  
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for  
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message  
comes on and stays on.  
TPMS Sensor Matching Process  
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.  
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors  
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes  
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel location.  
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel locations,  
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger  
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver  
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your  
dealer/retailer for service.  
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each  
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the  
tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure,  
do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure  
indicated on the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s  
air-pressure use the pointed end of the valve cap,  
a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.  
5-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel  
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match  
any tire and wheel position, the matching process stops  
and you need to start over.  
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to  
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.  
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and  
repeat the procedure in Step 5.  
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to  
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.  
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and  
repeat the procedure in Step 5.  
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:  
1. Set the parking brake.  
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the  
engine off.  
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to  
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.  
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat  
the procedure in Step 5.  
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the  
same time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS  
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the  
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.  
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver  
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound  
to indicate the tire learning process is done.  
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.  
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side  
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that  
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.  
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn  
mode, or if communication with the receiver stops,  
or if the time limit has expired, turn the ignition switch  
to LOCK/OFF and start over beginning with Step 2.  
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.  
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or  
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about  
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to  
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then  
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm  
the sensor identification code has been matched  
to the tire/wheel position.  
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure  
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading  
Information label.  
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Inspection and Rotation  
We recommend that you regularly inspect your  
vehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage.  
for more information.  
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles  
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance  
on page 6-4.  
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve  
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This  
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform  
most like it did when the tires were new.  
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use  
the correct rotation pattern shown here.  
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your  
tires as soon as possible and check wheel  
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.  
and Wheel Replacement on page 5-64 for  
more information.  
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the  
front and rear inflation pressures as shown on  
the Tire and Loading Information label. See  
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52 and  
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.  
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See  
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly  
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under  
Capacities and Specifications.  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One way to tell when  
it is time for new tires  
is to check the treadwear  
indicators, which will  
appear when your tires  
have only 1/16 inch  
(1.6 mm) or less of  
tread remaining.  
{CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts  
to which it is fastened, can make wheel  
nuts become loose after a time. The wheel  
could come off and cause a crash. When  
you change a wheel, remove any rust or  
dirt from places where the wheel attaches  
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can  
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;  
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush  
later, if you need to, to get all the rust  
or dirt off.  
You need new tires if any of the following statements  
are true:  
You can see the indicators at three or more  
places around the tire.  
When It Is Time for New Tires  
You can see cord or fabric showing through the  
tire’s rubber.  
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,  
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions  
influence when you need new tires.  
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged  
deep enough to show cord or fabric.  
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.  
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage  
that cannot be repaired well because of the  
size or location of the damage.  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are  
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if  
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast  
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading  
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With  
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out  
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure  
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,  
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.  
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a  
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall  
performance of your vehicle, including brake system  
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and  
tire pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec  
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the  
tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,  
the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS, for  
mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-47  
for additional information.  
Buying New Tires  
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This  
is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help  
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the  
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can  
affect the braking and handling performance of your  
vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-58  
for information on proper tire rotation.  
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your  
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on  
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet  
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification  
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement  
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with  
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle  
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the  
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal  
use, as the original tires.  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that  
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they  
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and  
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your  
vehicle’s original tires.  
{CAUTION:  
Mixing tires could cause you to lose  
control while driving. If you mix tires of  
different sizes, brands, or types (radial  
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may  
not handle properly, and you could have  
a crash. Using tires of different sizes,  
brands, or types may also cause damage  
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct  
size, brand, and type of tires on your  
vehicle’s wheels.  
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system  
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if  
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.  
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure  
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning  
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See  
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on  
the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading  
Your Vehicle on page 4-22, for more information about  
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location  
on your vehicle.  
{CAUTION:  
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,  
the wheel rim flanges could develop  
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire  
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing  
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with  
the wheels on your vehicle.  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Different Size Tires and Wheels  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than  
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may  
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its  
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,  
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle  
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,  
traction control, and stability control, the performance  
of these systems can be affected.  
Quality grades can be found where applicable  
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder  
and maximum section width. For example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
The following information relates to the system  
developed by the United States National Highway  
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which  
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and  
temperature performance. This applies only to  
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are  
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car  
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)  
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type  
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use  
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of  
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some  
limited-production tires.  
{CAUTION:  
If you add different sized wheels, your  
vehicle may not provide an acceptable  
level of performance and safety if tires not  
recommended for those wheels are selected.  
You may increase the chance that you will  
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use Saturn  
specific wheel and tire systems developed  
for your vehicle, and have them properly  
installed by a Saturn certified technician.  
While the tires available on General Motors  
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with  
respect to these grades, they must also conform  
to federal safety requirements and additional  
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)  
standards.  
See Buying New Tires on page 5-60 and Accessories  
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.  
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Treadwear  
Temperature – A, B, C  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based  
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under  
controlled conditions on a specified government  
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would  
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the  
government course as a tire graded 100. The  
relative performance of tires depends upon the  
actual conditions of their use, however, and may  
depart significantly from the norm due to variations  
in driving habits, service practices, and differences  
in road characteristics and climate.  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,  
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to  
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate  
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained  
high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive  
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.  
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under  
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard  
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels  
of performance on the laboratory test wheel  
than the minimum required by law.  
Traction – AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,  
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s  
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under  
controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C  
may have poor traction performance.  
Warning: The temperature grade for this  
tire is established for a tire that is properly  
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,  
underinflation, or excessive loading, either  
separately or in combination, can cause heat  
buildup and possible tire failure.  
Warning: The traction grade assigned to  
this tire is based on straight-ahead braking  
traction tests, and does not include  
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,  
or peak traction characteristics.  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying  
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted  
the same way as the one it replaces.  
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance  
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned  
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you  
the longest tire life and best overall performance.  
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing  
will not be necessary on a regular basis. However,  
if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling  
to one side or the other, the alignment might need  
to be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating  
when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels  
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer  
for proper diagnosis.  
{CAUTION:  
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel  
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be  
dangerous. It could affect the braking and  
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose  
air and make you lose control. You could have  
a collision in which you or others could be  
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel  
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.  
Wheel Replacement  
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly  
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,  
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be  
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some  
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).  
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.  
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,  
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturn  
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure  
to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts  
for your vehicle.  
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.  
5-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems  
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or  
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,  
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to  
the body and chassis.  
{CAUTION:  
Never use oil or grease on studs or the  
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the  
wheel nuts might come loose and the wheel  
could fall off, causing a crash.  
{CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts  
become loose after a time. The wheel  
could come off and cause a crash. When  
you change a wheel, remove any rust or  
dirt from places where the wheel attaches  
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can  
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;  
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush  
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or  
dirt off.  
{CAUTION:  
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened  
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become  
loose and even come off. This could lead to a  
crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.  
If you have to replace them, be sure to get  
new Saturn original equipment wheel nuts.  
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead  
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid  
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel  
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper  
torque specification.  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Used Replacement Wheels  
Tire Chains  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is  
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been  
used or how far it has been driven. It could  
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have  
to replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original  
equipment wheel.  
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough  
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle  
without the proper amount of clearance can  
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or  
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the  
tire chains could cause you to lose control  
of your vehicle and you or others may be  
injured in a crash.  
Use another type of traction device only if  
its manufacturer recommends it for use on  
your vehicle and tire size combination and  
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s  
instructions. To help avoid damage to your  
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the  
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and  
do not spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do  
find traction devices that will fit, install them  
on the front tires.  
5-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by  
driving slowly to a level place and stopping. Then do this:  
If a Tire Goes Flat  
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit.  
There is no spare tire, no tire changing equipment,  
and no place to store a tire.  
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard  
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.  
2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and  
put the shift lever in PARK (P). See Shifting Into  
PARK (P) on page 2-29.  
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,  
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See  
Tires on page 5-46. If air goes out of a tire, it is much  
more likely to leak out slowly. But, if you should  
ever have a blow out, here are a few tips about what  
to expect and what to do:  
3. Turn off the engine.  
4. Inspect the flat tire.  
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has  
damaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than a  
1
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that  
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.  
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake  
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.  
4
inch (6 mm), the tire is too severely damaged for  
the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective.  
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.  
1
If the tire has a puncture less than a 4 inch (6 mm)  
in the tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant and  
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much like  
a skid and may require the same correction you would  
use in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove your foot  
from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control  
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may  
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.  
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.  
Compressor Kit on page 5-68.  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit  
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit  
capable of sealing a small puncture up to 14 inch (6 mm)  
in the tread area of the tire. The kit inflates the tire with  
liquid sealant and air. The tire sealant and compressor  
kit can also be used to inflate an underinflated tire.  
After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure,  
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52, the vehicle  
must be driven for five miles, the tire pressure must be  
rechecked and adjusted as needed. See Using the  
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit later in this section.  
Be sure to read and follow all of the tire sealant and  
compressor kit instructions. The kit includes:  
A. Air Compressor  
E. Air Pressure Gage  
B. Tire Sealant Canister F. Air Compressor  
C. Air Compressor  
Accessory Plug  
Inflator Hose  
G. Sealant Filling Hose  
D. On/Off Switch  
After temporarily repairing a tire using the tire sealant  
and compressor kit, take your vehicle to an authorized  
dealer/retailer as soon as possible. If the sealant is  
removed within 100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving,  
then it is easier to clean from the tire and you are  
less likely to require a replacement tire.  
5-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Accessing the Tire Sealant and  
Compressor Kit  
Tire Sealant  
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the  
sealant canister.  
To access the tire sealant and compressor kit:  
The sealant can temporarily seal a small puncture up  
to ⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. The  
sealant cannot seal sidewall damage, large punctures,  
or a wheel that has unseated from the wheel. See  
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7 if you  
need assistance.  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-10 for  
1
more information.  
The sealant can only be used to seal one tire. After  
usage, the sealant canister and sealant filling hose  
assembly must be replaced at a dealer/retailer.  
See Removal and Installation of Sealant Canister  
later in this section.  
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant  
canister, if it has expired, see your dealer/retailer  
for a replacement.  
2. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit by  
turning the wing nut counterclockwise.  
3. Remove the sealant and compressor kit from  
its foam container.  
5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tire Sealant and  
Compressor Kit to Temporarily  
Seal a Punctured Tire  
Follow these directions closely for correct sealant usage.  
1. Place the sealant and compressor kit on the ground  
and unwrap the sealant filling hose from the  
compressor.  
2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug from  
the unit. To do this, pull the top portion of the  
wrapped cord out first, then the bottom, and then  
unsnap the plug. Do not insert the plug into an  
accessory outlet yet.  
3. Remove the valve stem or tire pressure monitoring  
sensor cap from the flat tire by turning it  
counterclockwise.  
If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated the tire,  
do not remove it.  
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire valve  
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.  
Make sure the sealant and compressor kit on/off  
switch (B) is in the O (off) position.  
5-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C) into  
an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.  
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-18  
for more information.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not slam door or close window on the  
compressor accessory plug.  
Inflating something too much can make it  
explode, and you or others could be injured.  
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and  
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.  
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).  
{CAUTION:  
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with  
the climate control system off can cause  
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine  
Exhaust on page 2-32.  
7. Push the On/Off kit switch to the I (on) position.  
The sealant and compressor kit injects sealant  
and air into the tire. Sealant could leak from  
the puncture hole until the vehicle is driven and  
the hole has sealed.  
The pressure gage will initially show a high pressure  
while the compressor injects the sealant into the  
tire. Once the sealant is completely dispersed into  
the tire, the pressure will quickly dropped and  
start to rise again as the tire inflates with air.  
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine  
for more information. The vehicle must be  
running while using the air compressor.  
5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation  
pressure, found on the Tire and Loading Information  
label located on the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar)  
below the vehicle’s door latch, using the air  
pressure gage on the top of the unit.  
12. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the tire  
valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and  
replace the tire valve stem cap.  
Be careful when handling the tire inflator  
components as they could be hot after usage.  
The pressure gage reads high while the compressor  
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an  
accurate pressure reading.  
13. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air  
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.  
14. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back in the  
air compressor. To do this, wrap the air compressor  
accessory plug, snap in the plug, and then push  
in the bottom and then the top of the wrapped  
air compressor accessory plug.  
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be  
reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle should not  
be driven. The tire is too severely damaged  
and cannot be inflated or sealed with the tire sealant  
and compressor kit. Remove the air compressor  
accessory plug from the accessory power outlet  
and unscrew the sealant filling hose from the  
tire valve or tire pressure monitoring sensor valve.  
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.  
15. If the flat tire was  
able to inflate to the  
recommended inflation  
pressure, remove  
the maximum speed  
label from the sealant  
canister.  
9. Push the On/Off switch to the O (off) position  
once the correct tire pressure is obtained.  
10. The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak  
air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is  
distributed in the tire.  
Steps 11 through 17 must be done right after  
Step 10.  
11. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug from  
the accessory power outlet in the vehicle.  
Place it in a highly visible location such as the  
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield  
or to the face of the radio/clock.  
5-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive  
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until  
you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired.  
{CAUTION:  
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or  
other equipment in the passenger compartment  
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden  
stop or collision, loose equipment could strike  
someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor  
kit in the proper place.  
17. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to  
distribute the sealant evenly in the tire. Stop at a safe  
location and check the tire pressure, refer to Steps 1  
through 8 under “Using the Air Compressor without  
Sealant” next in this section.  
18. If the tire pressure has fallen more then  
10 psi (68 kPa), below the recommended inflation  
pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is  
too severely damaged and the tire sealant and  
compressor cannot seal the tire. See Roadside  
Assistance Program on page 7-7.  
16. Return the equipment to the proper storage  
location in the trunk of your vehicle. Turn the  
wing nut clockwise to secure the tire sealant  
and compressor kit.  
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than  
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation  
pressure, inflate the tire back up to the  
recommended inflation pressure.  
5-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire or  
vehicle with a rag.  
20. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local  
dealer/retailer or in accordance with local  
state codes and practices.  
After using the sealant canister, replace it with  
a new canister from your dealer/retailer.  
21. After temporarily sealing a tire with the tire sealant  
and compressor kit, take your vehicle to your  
dealer/retailer to have the tire inspected and  
repaired.  
Using the Air Compressor without  
Sealant to Inflate an Underinflated Tire  
(Not Punctured)  
2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the sealant  
canister by pulling up on the lever.  
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only  
and not sealant:  
3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the  
sealant canister.  
1. Remove the air compressor inflating hose connector  
from the bottom of the air compressor.  
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the tire  
valve stem and push the lever down to secure in  
place.  
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into an  
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See Accessory  
Power Outlet(s) on page 3-18 for more information.  
5-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Inflate the tire up to the recommended inflation  
pressure using the air pressure gage on the top  
of the unit.  
{CAUTION:  
9. Turn off the air compressor by moving the switch  
to the O (off) position.  
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with  
the climate control system off can cause  
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine  
Exhaust on page 2-32.  
The pressure gage reads high while the compressor  
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an  
accurate reading. See Inflation - Tire Pressure  
on page 5-52 for more information.  
10. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and  
wrap the hose in the bottom of the sealant and  
compressor kit.  
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine  
for more information. The vehicle must be running  
while using the air compressor.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Storing the tire sealant and compressor  
kit or other equipment in the passenger  
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.  
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment  
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant  
and compressor kit in the proper place.  
Inflating something too much can make it  
explode, and you or others could be injured.  
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and  
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.  
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).  
11. Place the equipment in the original location in  
the trunk of your vehicle.  
7. Push the sealant and compressor kit switch to  
the I (on) position.  
5-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation of the  
Sealant Canister  
To remove the sealant canister:  
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling hose  
is aligned with the slot in the compressor.  
1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from the  
sealant canister by pulling the lever up.  
5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor and  
replace with a new sealant canister. See your  
dealer/retailer for more information.  
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose from  
the sealant canister.  
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the  
compressor.  
5-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To install a new sealant canister:  
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent  
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments  
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also  
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.  
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in the  
air compressor.  
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it  
clockwise.  
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners  
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.  
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on  
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass  
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray  
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,  
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.  
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air  
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.  
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the  
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.  
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning  
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch  
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window  
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your  
Appearance Care  
Interior Cleaning  
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.  
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it  
is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust  
and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can  
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.  
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles  
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your  
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.  
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your  
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat  
that could cause stains to set rapidly.  
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become  
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.  
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety  
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s  
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening  
your vehicle’s doors and windows.  
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs  
using a small brush with soft bristles.  
5-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your  
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can  
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove  
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.  
Fabric/Carpet  
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment  
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister  
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used  
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always  
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.  
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as  
possible using one of the following techniques:  
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners  
or techniques:  
Never use a knife or any other sharp object to  
remove a soil from any interior surface.  
Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to  
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.  
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper  
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel  
until no more can be removed.  
Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively  
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure  
can damage your interior and does not improve  
the effectiveness of soil removal.  
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and  
then vacuum.  
To clean, use the following instructions:  
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry  
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.  
Using too much soap will leave a residue that  
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,  
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a  
good guide.  
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or  
club soda.  
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.  
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub  
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean  
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.  
Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while  
cleaning.  
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the  
cleaning cloth remains clean.  
Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from  
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,  
alcohol, etc.  
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild  
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process  
that was used with plain water.  
5-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner  
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial  
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test  
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the  
locally cleaned area gives any impression that a  
ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.  
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your  
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause  
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make  
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain  
conditions.  
After the cleaning process has been completed,  
a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture  
from the fabric or carpet.  
Care of Safety Belts  
Keep belts clean and dry.  
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other  
Plastic Surfaces  
{CAUTION:  
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,  
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,  
they might not be able to provide adequate  
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild  
soap and lukewarm water.  
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to  
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,  
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution  
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never  
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.  
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are  
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may  
permanently change the appearance and feel of  
your interior and are not recommended. Do not use  
silicone or wax-based products, or those containing  
organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because  
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss  
in a non-uniform manner.  
5-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance  
Materials on page 5-84. Follow all manufacturers’  
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary  
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any  
vehicle care product.  
Weatherstrips  
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last  
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply  
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,  
damp weather frequent application may be required.  
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to  
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are  
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.  
Washing Your Vehicle  
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton  
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting  
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to  
keep it clean by washing it often.  
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter  
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer  
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.  
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)  
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.  
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that  
can damage the emblems or nameplates on  
your vehicle. Check the cleaning product label.  
If it states that it should not be used on plastic  
parts, do not use it on your vehicle or damage may  
occur and it would not be covered by the warranty.  
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses  
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a  
car washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are  
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,  
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your  
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained  
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a  
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.  
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle  
on page 5-80.  
5-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather  
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a  
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish  
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered  
whenever possible.  
Finish Care  
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by  
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the  
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products  
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance  
Materials on page 5-84.  
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts  
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep  
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually  
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on  
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.  
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,  
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored  
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are  
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat  
paint finish.  
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging  
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,  
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating  
of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for  
all bright metal parts.  
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive  
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish  
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and  
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat  
paint finish on your vehicle.  
Windshield and Wiper Blades  
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other  
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,  
bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys,  
etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain  
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as  
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners  
that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove  
foreign matter.  
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.  
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or  
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or  
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when  
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a  
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper  
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn  
or damaged.  
5-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Wipers can be damaged by:  
Extreme dusty conditions  
Sand and salt  
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild  
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing  
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then  
be applied.  
Heat and sun  
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels  
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish  
on chrome wheels only.  
Snow and ice, without proper removal  
Aluminum Wheels  
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted  
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,  
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,  
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on  
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not  
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.  
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may  
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after  
driving on roads that have been sprayed with  
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These  
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as  
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome  
with soap and water after exposure.  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an  
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire  
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum  
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle  
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels  
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone  
carbide tire cleaning brushes.  
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,  
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners  
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated  
wheels, you could damage the surface of the  
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum  
or chrome-plated wheels.  
5-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires  
Underbody Maintenance  
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.  
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust  
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not  
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the  
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,  
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion  
protection.  
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing  
products on your vehicle may damage the paint  
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,  
always wipe off any overspray from all painted  
surfaces on your vehicle.  
At least every spring, flush these materials from the  
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud  
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of  
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.  
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system  
can do this for you.  
Sheet Metal Damage  
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal  
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop  
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or  
replaced to restore corrosion protection.  
Chemical Paint Spotting  
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide  
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.  
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a  
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and  
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage  
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,  
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint  
surface.  
Finish Damage  
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish  
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode  
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.  
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we  
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces  
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within  
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,  
whichever occurs first.  
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up  
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger  
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your  
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.  
5-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials  
Description  
Usage  
Removes swirl marks, fine  
scratches, and other light  
surface contamination.  
Description  
Usage  
Swirl Remover Polish  
Polishing Cloth  
Wax-Treated  
Interior and exterior  
polishing cloth.  
Removes light scratches  
and protects finish.  
Cleaner Wax  
Tar and Road Oil  
Remover  
Removes tar, road oil,  
and asphalt.  
Cleans, shines,  
and protects tires.  
No wiping necessary.  
Foaming Tire Shine  
Low Gloss  
Chrome Cleaner  
and Polish  
Use on chrome or  
stainless steel.  
Medium foaming  
shampoo. Cleans  
and lightly waxes.  
Biodegradable and  
phosphate free.  
White Sidewall  
Tire Cleaner  
Removes soil and black  
marks from whitewalls.  
Wash Wax Concentrate  
Vinyl Cleaner  
Glass Cleaner  
Cleans vinyl.  
Removes dirt, grime,  
smoke, and fingerprints.  
Removes spots and  
stains from carpets, vinyl,  
and cloth upholstery.  
Spot Lifter  
Removes dirt and grime  
from chrome wheels  
and wire wheel covers.  
Chrome and Wire  
Wheel Cleaner  
Odorless spray odor  
eliminator used on fabrics,  
vinyl, leather, and carpet.  
Odor Eliminator  
Removes dust,  
fingerprints, and  
surface contaminants.  
Spray on wipe off.  
Finish Enhancer  
5-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Identification  
Vehicle Identification  
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.  
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,  
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities  
and Specifications on page 5-95 for your vehicle’s  
engine code.  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Service Parts Identification Label  
This label is on the inside of the glove box.  
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.  
The label has the following information:  
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears  
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,  
on the driver side. You can see it if you look through  
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN  
also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service  
Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Model designation  
Paint information  
Production options and special equipment  
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.  
5-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Windshield Wiper Fuses  
Electrical System  
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal  
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats  
due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the  
motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical  
problem, have it fixed.  
Add-On Electrical Equipment  
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your  
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer  
first. Some electrical equipment can damage  
your vehicle and the damage would not be covered  
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment  
can keep other components from working as  
they should.  
Power Windows and Other  
Power Options  
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.  
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens  
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.  
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,  
even if your vehicle is not operating.  
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting  
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing  
5-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
Instrument Panel Fuse Block  
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from  
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers  
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of  
damage caused by electrical problems.  
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the  
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure  
to replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size  
and rating.  
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in  
the center of the instrument panel, one in the engine  
compartment and one in the trunk.  
There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panel  
fuse block. It can be used to easily remove fuses  
from the fuse block.  
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the  
passenger side of the vehicle, on the lower portion  
of the instrument panel near the floor.  
Remove the panel cover to access the fuse block,  
then remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses.  
Your vehicle might not have all the fuses and  
features listed.  
5-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
POWER  
MIRRORS  
Usage  
Fuses  
RUN/CRANK  
HVAC  
Usage  
Cruise Control Switch, Passenger  
Airbag Status Indicator  
Power Mirrors  
Not Used  
NOT  
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning  
INSTALLED  
BLOWER HIGH Blower - High Speed Relay  
5-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
Usage  
Fuses  
Usage  
CLUSTER/  
THEFT  
ONSTAR  
NOT  
INSTALLED  
Instrument Panel Cluster,  
Theft Deterrent System  
DOOR LOCK  
ROOF/  
HEAT SEAT  
NOT  
INSTALLED  
Door Locks  
Sunroof, Power Windows  
Not Used  
OnStar®  
Not Used  
AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag (Ignition)  
NOT  
Not Used  
INSTALLED  
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning  
Control Diagnostic Link Connector  
(Battery)  
HVAC  
CTRL (BATT)  
AIRBAG (BATT) Airbag (Battery)  
SPARE FUSE  
Spare Fuse Holder  
HOLDER  
PEDAL  
Adjustable Pedals  
WIPER SW  
IGN SENSOR  
STRG WHL  
ILLUM  
NOT  
INSTALLED  
RADIO  
INTERIOR  
LIGHTS  
REAR WIPER  
POWER  
WINDOWS  
HVAC  
CTRL (IGN)  
HVAC  
BLOWER  
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch  
Ignition Switch  
SPARE FUSE  
Spare Fuse Holder  
HOLDER  
SPARE FUSE  
Spare Fuse Holder  
HOLDER  
SPARE FUSE  
Spare Fuse Holder  
HOLDER  
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller  
Steering Wheel Illumination  
Not Used  
Audio System  
Interior Lamps  
Not Used  
Engine Compartment Fuse Block  
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the  
driver side of the engine compartment, near the battery.  
Power Windows  
Your vehicle might not have all the fuses and  
features listed.  
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning  
Control (Ignition)  
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning  
Blower Switch  
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components  
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the  
covers on any electrical component.  
5-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
Usage  
Fuses  
Usage  
1
2
3
Air Conditioner Clutch  
Electronic Throttle Control  
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) IGN  
Transmission, Transmission  
Control Module Ignition 1  
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) Pumps  
4
5
5-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
Usage  
Fuses  
Usage  
6
7
8
Emission  
Left Headlamp Low-Beam  
Horn  
Right Headlamp Low-Beam  
Left Headlamp High-Beam  
Right Headlamp High-Beam  
Engine Control Module BATT  
Windshield Wiper  
Antilock Brake  
System (ABS) (IGN 1)  
Engine Control Module (IGN 1)  
Cooling Fan 1  
Cooling Fan 2  
41  
Electric Power Steering  
Transmission Control  
Module Battery  
Ignition Module  
Injectors  
Daytime Running Lamps  
Center High-Mounted Stoplamps  
Driver Power Window  
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) BATT  
Transmission Pump Motor  
Battery Voltage Sense  
42  
43  
44  
46  
47  
50  
51  
52  
54  
9
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
Relays  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
Usage  
Cooling Fan 1  
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel  
Cooling Fan 2  
Starter  
Run/Crank, Ignition  
Powertrain  
Air Conditioning Clutch  
High-Beam Headlamp  
Horn  
Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation,  
Air Conditioning Blower  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
Body Control Module 1  
Body Control Module Run/Crank  
Rear Electrical Center 1  
Rear Electrical Center 2  
Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
Body Control Module 2  
Starter  
37  
5-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Compartment Fuse Block  
Relays  
38  
39  
Usage  
Low-Beam Headlamp  
Windshield Wiper 1  
40  
Windshield Wiper 2  
48  
49  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)  
Stoplamps  
53  
Transmission Pump Motor  
Diodes  
Usage  
27  
Wiper  
The rear compartment fuse block is located in the  
trunk of the vehicle. Access the fuse block through the  
trunk panel on the driver side of the rear cargo area.  
5-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
Usage  
Passenger Seat Controls  
Driver Seat Controls  
Not Used  
Fuses  
Usage  
1
2
3
4
5
Emission 2, Canister Vent Solenoid  
Park Lamps, Instrument  
Panel Dimming  
6
7
Not Used  
Not Used  
5-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
8
Usage  
Fuses  
23  
24  
Usage  
Usage  
Rear Window Defogger  
Park Lamps  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Rear Defog  
Heated Mirrors  
Fuel Pump  
9
Sliding Panel Roof  
Sunroof Controls  
Not Used  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
25  
Not Used  
Relays  
26  
27  
28  
Audio Amplifier  
Heated Seat Controls  
Not Used  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System, XM™ Satellite  
Radio, UGDO  
Back-up Lamps  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Auxiliary Power Outlets  
Not Used  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Back-up Lamps  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Trunk Release  
Fuel Pump  
Cargo Lamp  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
Trunk Release  
38 (Diode)  
5-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Capacities and Specifications  
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.  
Capacities  
Application  
English  
Metric  
For the air conditioning system refrigerant  
charge amount, see the refrigerant caution  
label located under the hood. See your  
dealer/retailer for more information.  
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a  
Cooling System  
8.1 qt  
7.0 qt  
7.7 L  
6.6 L  
Transmission (Bottom Pan Removal)  
Engine Oil with Filter  
Fuel Tank  
5.0 qt  
4.7 L  
16.3 gal  
100 lb ft  
61.7 L  
140 Y  
Wheel Nut Torque  
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.  
Engine Specifications  
Engine  
VIN Code  
Transmission  
Spark Plug Gap  
2.4L L4  
5
Automatic  
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)  
5-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
5-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Maintenance Schedule  
Maintenance Schedule  
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working  
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will  
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a  
few times a week. Or you might drive long distances  
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might  
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might  
drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.  
Introduction  
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level  
and change as recommended.  
Maintenance Requirements  
Because of all the different ways people use their  
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more  
frequent checks and replacements. So please read  
the following and note how you drive. If you have any  
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,  
see your dealer/retailer.  
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,  
replacement parts, and recommended fluids  
and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are  
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working  
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow  
scheduled maintenance might not be covered  
by warranty.  
This schedule is for vehicles that:  
carry passengers and cargo within recommended  
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. See Loading Your  
Vehicle on page 4-22.  
Your Vehicle and the Environment  
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep  
your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps  
the environment. All recommended maintenance is  
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even  
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid  
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level  
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our  
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,  
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.  
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within  
legal driving limits.  
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane  
on page 5-6.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4  
should be performed when indicated. See Additional  
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.  
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,  
unless you are technically qualified and have the  
necessary equipment, you should have your  
dealer/retailer do these jobs.  
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service  
needs, you will know that trained and supported service  
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.  
{CAUTION:  
If you want to purchase service information, see  
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle  
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,  
you can be seriously injured. Do your own  
maintenance work only if you have the  
required know-how and the proper tools and  
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,  
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified  
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own  
Service Work on page 5-4.  
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what  
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can  
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.  
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to  
on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make  
sure these are used. All parts should be replaced  
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone  
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of  
genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,  
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.  
Required services are described in the following for  
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,  
it is recommended that your first service be  
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,  
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II  
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II  
might be required more often.  
Scheduled Maintenance  
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message in the Driver  
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that service  
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced  
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).  
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best  
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that  
vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However, the  
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year  
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/  
retailer has trained service technicians who will perform  
this work using genuine parts and reset the system.  
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message  
comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was  
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.  
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous  
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use  
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on  
10 months or more since the last service or if the  
message has not come on at all for one year.  
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you  
must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)  
since your last service. Remember to reset the oil life  
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life  
System on page 5-18 for information on the Engine Oil  
Life System and resetting the system.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scheduled Maintenance  
Service  
Maintenance I Maintenance II  
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life system.  
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service.  
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. See footnote (k).  
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and  
Rotation on page 5-58 and At Least Once a Month on page 6-9.  
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).  
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid  
as needed.  
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”  
in this section.  
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).  
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).  
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).  
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).  
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).  
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Required Services  
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)  
shown for each item.  
Additional Required Services  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
Inspect fuel system for damage  
or leaks.  
Inspect exhaust system for loose or  
damaged components.  
Inspect underbody 36-volt battery  
system cable. See footnote (l).  
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See  
Change automatic transmission  
fluid and filter (severe service only).  
See footnote (h).  
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug  
wires. An Emission Control Service.  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Required Services (cont’d)  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
Engine cooling system service  
(or every five years, whichever occurs  
first). An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (i).  
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (m).  
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they  
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,  
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as  
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test  
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the  
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is  
recommended at least once a year.  
Maintenance Footnotes  
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper  
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect  
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface  
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,  
parking brake, etc.  
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or  
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,  
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn  
on page 5-45 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on  
page 5-81 for more information.  
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and  
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or  
signs of wear. Inspect electric power steering cables  
for proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety  
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any  
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you  
see anything that might keep a safety belt system  
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or  
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking  
the Restraint Systems on page 1-70.  
When doing frequent trailer towing.  
Uses such as found in taxi, police,  
or delivery service.  
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these  
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.  
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service  
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer  
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-22  
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,  
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure  
test the cooling system and pressure cap.  
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and  
latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hinges  
and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required  
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying  
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth  
will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick  
or squeak.  
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a  
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and  
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.  
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for  
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.  
Replace any components that have high effort or  
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or  
cruise control cables.  
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect  
the filter at each engine oil change.  
(l) Visually inspect underbody 36-volt battery system  
cable for damage. Replace cable if necessary.  
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the  
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these  
conditions:  
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,  
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.  
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature  
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.  
In hilly or mountainous terrain.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Coolant Level Check  
Owner Checks and Services  
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®  
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant  
on page 5-22.  
These owner checks and services should be performed  
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,  
dependability, and emission control performance of your  
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these  
checks and services.  
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check  
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the  
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the  
proper fluid if necessary.  
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.  
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your  
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown  
At Least Once a Month  
At Each Fuel Fill  
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check  
It is important to perform these underhood checks  
at each fuel fill.  
Inspect your vehicle’s tires for wear and make  
sure they are inflated to the correct pressures.  
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.  
Engine Oil Level Check  
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil  
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to  
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause  
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.  
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil  
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock  
Control System Check  
At Least Once a Year  
Starter Switch Check  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
When you are doing this inspection, the  
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle  
moves, you or others could be injured.  
When you are doing this inspection, the  
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle  
moves, you or others could be injured.  
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room  
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level  
surface.  
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room  
around the vehicle.  
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular  
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake  
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-28.  
on page 2-28.  
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready  
to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.  
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately  
if the vehicle begins to move.  
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle  
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).  
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact  
your dealer/retailer for service.  
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,  
but do not start the engine. Without applying the  
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out  
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever  
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer  
for service.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing  
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,  
set the parking brake.  
Ignition Transmission Lock Check  
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn  
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.  
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:  
With the engine running and the transmission  
in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure  
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the  
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.  
The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only  
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).  
The ignition key should come out only in  
LOCK/OFF.  
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding  
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).  
Then release the parking brake followed by the  
regular brake.  
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.  
Parking Brake and Automatic  
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check  
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.  
Underbody Flushing Service  
{CAUTION:  
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any  
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care  
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other  
debris can collect.  
When you are doing this check, your vehicle  
could begin to move. You or others could  
be injured and property could be damaged.  
Make sure there is room in front of your  
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to  
apply the regular brake at once should the  
vehicle begin to move.  
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit  
Check the sealant expiration date printed on the  
instruction label of the Tire Sealant and Compressor  
Kit (if equipped) at least once a year. See your  
dealer/retailer for a replacement canister.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
DEXRON®-VI Automatic  
Automatic  
Transmission Transmission Fluid.  
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,  
part number, or specification can be obtained from  
your dealer/retailer.  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 10953474).  
Key Lock  
Cylinders  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Hood Latch  
Assembly,  
Secondary  
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,  
Engine oil which meets  
GM Standard GM6094M and  
displays the American Petroleum  
Institute Certified for Gasoline  
Engines starburst symbol.  
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant  
Spring  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Anchor, and Category LB or GC-LB.  
Release Pawl  
Engine Oil  
To determine the proper viscosity  
for your vehicle’s engine, see  
Engine Oil on page 5-15.  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 109435474).  
Hood and  
Door Hinges  
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable  
water and use only DEX-COOL®  
Coolant. See Engine Coolant  
on page 5-22.  
Engine  
Coolant  
Weatherstrip Lubricant  
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,  
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or  
Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,  
in Canada 992887).  
Windshield  
Washer  
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Replacement Parts  
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.  
Part  
Part Numbers  
22676970  
ACDelco® Part Numbers  
A1627C  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
Engine Oil Filter  
12605566  
PF457G  
Spark Plugs  
12598004  
41-103  
Windshield Wiper Blades  
Driver’s Side – 23.6 inches (60.0 cm)  
Passenger’s Side – 21.0 inches (53.0 cm)  
25800624  
25800623  
The engine drive belt on this hybrid vehicle is under  
a higher tension than the engine drive belt on a  
non-hybrid vehicle and requires the use of a special  
kind of tool to service. See your dealer/retailer  
for service.  
Engine Drive Belt Routing  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record  
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,  
and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2.  
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following  
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.  
Maintenance Record  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
contact the Saturn Customer Communication Centre  
at 1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance  
Center team member will handle your call and assist  
in providing product and warranty information, the  
nearest retailer location, roadside assistance, brochures,  
literature and discuss any concerns you may have.  
Customer Assistance and  
Information  
Customer Satisfaction Procedure  
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your  
retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed to  
providing our customers with unparalleled service,  
before, during, and after the purchase of a Saturn vehicle,  
for total customer satisfaction. We call this the Saturn  
Difference. Normally, any concerns with the sales  
transaction or the operation of your vehicle are resolved  
by your retailer’s sales or service departments. If, for any  
reason, your ownership experience falls below your  
expectations, we suggest you take the following action:  
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in  
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please  
have the following information available to give  
the Customer Assistance Representative:  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This 17-digit  
number can be found on the vehicle registration  
or title, on the upper driver side corner of the  
dash, or on your roadside assistance key card.  
The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.  
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.  
Your daytime and evening phone numbers.  
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance  
Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has  
the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.  
Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.  
When contacting Saturn, please remember that your  
concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility.  
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if  
you have a concern.  
STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance,  
in the U.S., contact the Saturn Customer Assistance  
Center by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada,  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and its  
retailers are committed to making sure you are  
completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle. However,  
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following  
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,  
Saturn and its retailers offer the additional assistance  
of a neutral party through our voluntary participation  
in a mediation/arbitration program called Better  
Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.  
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the  
toll-free telephone number or by writing them at  
the following address:  
BBB Auto Line Program  
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.  
4200 Wilson Boulevard  
Suite 800  
Arlington, VA 22203-1838  
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100  
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court  
program administered by the Council of Better  
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes  
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of  
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program  
is available at no cost to you, our customer.  
This program is available in all 50 states and the  
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle  
age, mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation  
reserves the right to change eligibility limitations  
and/or discontinue its participation in this program.  
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):  
Although you may be required to resort to this informal  
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court  
action, use of the program is free of charge and  
your case is generally heard within 40 days. If you  
do not agree with the decision given in your case,  
you can reject it and proceed with any other venue  
for relief available to you.  
General Motors Participation in the  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have  
been addressed after following the procedure outlined  
in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited  
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes  
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The  
program provides for the review of the facts involved  
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include  
an informal hearing before the arbiter.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The program is designed so that the entire dispute  
settlement process, from the time you file your  
complaint to the final decision, should be completed  
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial  
program offers advantages over courts in most  
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and  
free of charge.  
Online Owner Center  
(United States only)  
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturn  
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information  
can be found in one place.  
For further information concerning eligibility in the  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),  
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may  
call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre,  
1-800-263-1999, or you may write to:  
The Online Owner Center allows you to:  
Get e-mail service reminders.  
Access information about your specific vehicle,  
including tips and videos and an electronic  
version of this owner manual.  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
c/o Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Mail Code: CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and  
maintenance schedule.  
Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.  
Receive special promotions and privileges only  
available to members.  
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100  
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).  
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated  
information and to register your vehicle.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
My GM Canada (Canada only)  
Customer Assistance for Text  
Telephone (TTY) Users  
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of  
gmcanada.com where you can save information on  
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy  
tools and forms with greater ease.  
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties,  
Saturn has installed special TDD (Telecommunication  
Devices for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer  
Assistance Center.  
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you  
will have access to:  
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer who  
has access to a TDD or to a conventional Text  
Telephone (TTY) can communicate with Saturn by  
dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may  
dial 1-800-263-3830.  
− My Showroom: Find and save information on  
vehicles and current offers in your area.  
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as  
address and phone number for each of your  
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.  
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and  
helpful advice on owning and maintaining  
your vehicle.  
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to  
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.  
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada  
section within www.gmcanada.com.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Assistance Offices  
GM Mobility Reimbursement  
Program  
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free  
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to  
write to Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:  
Saturn Customer Assistance Center  
100 Saturn Parkway  
Mail Code 371-999-S24  
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500  
1-800-553-6000  
1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone  
devices (TTYs))  
This program, available to qualified applicants, can  
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket  
driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may  
require for your vehicle such as hand controls,  
wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000  
In Canada, write to:  
Saturn Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Ltd.  
CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
The offer is available for a limited period of time from  
the date of vehicle purchase/lease.  
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s  
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn  
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000.  
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.  
www.gmcanada.com  
1-800-263-1999  
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone  
devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800  
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer  
Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999.  
TTY users in Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lock-out Service: Lock-out service is covered  
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into  
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available  
if you have an active OnStar® subscription.  
Roadside Assistance Program  
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call 1-800-553-6000;  
(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438).  
To ensure security, the driver must present personal  
identification before lock-out service is provided.  
In Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.  
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.  
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.  
As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are  
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside  
Assistance Program.  
Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway  
or Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer for  
warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling  
crash. Winch-out assistance is provided when the  
vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.  
Who is Covered?  
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle  
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,  
a person driving this vehicle without the consent  
of the owner is not eligible for coverage.  
Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in  
good condition, when equipped and properly  
inflated, is covered at no charge. The customer  
is responsible for the repair or replacement of  
the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.  
Services Provided  
Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no  
The following services are provided in the U.S. and  
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),  
whichever comes first, and, in Canada only,  
up to a maximum of $100.  
charge if the vehicle does not start.  
Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the  
vehicle to get to the nearest service station  
(approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, service  
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety  
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels  
are not provided through this service.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a  
copy of the repair order are required.  
Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon  
request, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,  
computer personalized maps, highlighting your  
choice of either the most direct route or the most  
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in  
North America, along with helpful travel information  
pertaining to your trip.  
Once authorization has been given, your advisor  
will help you make any necessary arrangements  
and explain how to claim for trip interruption expense  
assistance.  
Alternative Service (Canada only): There could  
be times when Roadside Assistance cannot provide  
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to  
secure local emergency road service, and you will  
be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the  
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.  
Please allow three weeks before your planned  
departure date. Trip routing requests are limited  
to six per calendar year.  
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance  
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty  
related vehicle disablement, while en route and  
over 250 kilometres from the original point of  
departure, you might qualify for trip interruption  
expense assistance. This assistance covers  
reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum  
of $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of  
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),  
and (C) alternate ground transportation (maximum  
of $40/day). This benefit is to assist you with  
some of the unplanned expense you may incur  
while waiting for your vehicle to be repaired.  
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.  
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty  
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.  
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve  
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an  
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims  
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the  
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve  
the right to make any changes or discontinue the  
Roadside Assistance program at any time without  
notification.  
Calling for Assistance  
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,  
please provide the following to the Roadside  
Assistance Representatives:  
Your name, home address, and home  
telephone number  
Scheduling Service Appointments  
Telephone number of your location  
Location of the vehicle  
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact  
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.  
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your  
service consultant of your transportation needs, your  
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.  
Model, year, color, and license plate number  
of the vehicle  
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle  
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service  
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be  
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is  
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,  
let them know this, and ask for instructions.  
Description of the problem  
Towing and Road Service Exclusions  
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance  
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated  
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound  
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal,  
State, Provincial or Federal law, and mounting,  
dismounting or changing of snow tires, chains, or  
other traction devices.  
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the  
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in  
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shuttle Service  
Courtesy Transportation  
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering  
Courtesy Transportation. Retailers may provide you  
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with  
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes  
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable  
time and distance parameters of the retailer’s area.  
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our  
participating retailers are proud to offer Courtesy  
Transportation, a customer support program for  
vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty  
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain  
warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.  
Public Transportation or Fuel  
Reimbursement  
Several courtesy transportation options are available to  
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty  
repairs are required.  
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and  
public transportation is used instead of the retailer’s  
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by  
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum  
amount allowed by Saturn for shuttle service. In addition,  
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation  
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for  
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim  
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported  
by original receipts. See your retailer for information  
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of  
fuel or other transportation costs.  
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New  
Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled  
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” furnished  
with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty  
coverage information.  
Transportation Options  
Warranty service can generally be completed while you  
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Saturn helps  
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several  
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,  
your retailer can offer you one of the following:  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Courtesy Rental Vehicle  
Collision Damage Repair  
Your retailer may arrange to provide you with a  
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental  
vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for  
an overnight warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will  
be limited and must be supported by original receipts.  
This requires that you sign and complete a rental  
agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental  
vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary  
and may include minimum age requirements, insurance  
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for  
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible  
for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or  
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.  
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,  
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician  
using the proper equipment and quality replacement  
parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your  
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be  
compromised in subsequent collisions.  
Collision Parts  
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the  
same materials and construction methods as the parts  
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM  
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your  
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety  
are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help  
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.  
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a  
courtesy rental.  
Additional Program Information  
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for  
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles  
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,  
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections  
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,  
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s  
originally designed appearance and safety performance,  
however, the history of these parts is not known.  
Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle  
Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not  
covered by that warranty.  
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be  
available at every retailer. Please contact your retailer  
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy  
Transportation arrangements will be administered  
by appropriate retailer personnel.  
Saturn reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change  
or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time  
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant  
to the terms and conditions described herein at its  
sole discretion.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These  
are made by companies other than GM and may  
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,  
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature  
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform  
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts  
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited  
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such  
parts are not covered by that warranty.  
Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket  
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we  
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired  
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such  
insurance coverage is not available from your current  
insurance carrier, consider switching to another  
insurance carrier.  
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may  
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with  
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)  
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.  
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at  
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.  
Repair Facility  
GM also recommends that you choose a collision  
repair facility that meets your needs before you ever  
need collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have  
a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and  
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend  
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians  
and comparable equipment.  
If a Crash Occurs  
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.  
Try to relax and then check to make sure you  
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that  
no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,  
is injured.  
Insuring Your Vehicle  
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with  
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.  
There are significant differences in the quality of  
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.  
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection  
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for  
damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts.  
If there has been an injury, call emergency services  
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until  
all matters have been taken care of. Move your  
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you  
are instructed to move it by a police officer.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Give only the necessary and requested information  
to police and other parties involved in the crash.  
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental  
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.  
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.  
If possible, call your insurance company from the  
scene of the crash. They will walk you through  
the information they will need. If they ask for a  
police report, phone or go to the police department  
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of  
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces  
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be  
necessary. This is especially true if there are no  
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.  
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside  
on page 7-7 for more information.  
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the  
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from  
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s  
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.  
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your  
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a  
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,  
make sure you are comfortable with them.  
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable  
with their work for a long time.  
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before  
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your  
insurance information and registration if you keep  
these items in your vehicle.  
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and  
make sure you understand what work will be  
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,  
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome  
this opportunity.  
Gather the important information you will need  
from the other driver. Things like name, address,  
phone number, driver’s license number, vehicle  
license plate, vehicle make, model and model year,  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance  
company and policy number, and a general  
description of the damage to the other vehicle.  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing the Vehicle Damage  
Repair Process  
Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
United States Government  
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,  
GM recommends that you take an active role in its  
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of  
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.  
Specify to the facility that any required replacement  
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new  
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.  
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by  
your GM vehicle warranty.  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which  
could cause a crash or could cause injury or  
death, you should immediately inform the National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),  
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could open  
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect  
exists in a group of vehicles, it could order a recall  
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot  
become involved in individual problems between  
you, your retailer or Saturn Corporation.  
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must  
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,  
your insurance company may initially value the  
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with  
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM  
parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you may  
be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with  
Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage  
does not pay the full cost.  
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline  
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);  
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:  
Administrator, NHTSA  
400 Seventh Street, SW.  
Washington D.C., 20590  
If another party’s insurance company is paying for  
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair  
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision  
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits  
with that company. In such cases, you can have control  
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays  
within reasonable limits.  
You can also obtain other information about motor  
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write:  
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
Canadian Government  
Saturn Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your  
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada  
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors  
of Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510  
or write to:  
Service Publications Ordering  
Information  
Transport Canada  
Road Safety Branch  
2780 Sheffield Road  
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9  
Service Manuals  
A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn  
service manuals are written for trained technicians,  
and in some cases, specialized tools and equipment  
are necessary to complete certain repairs. However,  
the manuals are available to owners who either have  
the training, or wish to gain a greater understanding  
of the technical aspect of their Saturn.  
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn  
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)  
in a situation like this, please notify Saturn.  
Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:  
Saturn Corporation  
100 Saturn Parkway  
Mail Drop 371-999-S24  
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500  
For additional publications information or to order  
publications in the United States, call toll free  
1-800-2-SATURN or visit www.saturn-publications.com  
to order on-line.  
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by  
calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small  
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified  
technician may have to determine if a specific  
bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,  
call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit  
www.saturn-publications.com to order online.  
Owner Publications  
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as  
described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states  
and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and  
light trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)  
less than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of  
individual bulletins are also at your participating  
Saturn retailer. You can ask to see them.  
Vehicle Data Recording  
and Privacy  
In Canada, information relating to product service  
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your  
Saturn retailer.  
Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated  
computers that record information about the vehicle’s  
performance and how it is driven. For example,  
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor  
and control engine and transmission performance,  
to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment  
and deploy airbags in a crash and, if so equipped,  
to provide antilock braking to help the driver control  
the vehicle. These modules may store data to help  
your dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle.  
Some modules may also store data about how  
you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel  
consumption or average speed. These modules  
may also retain the owner’s personal preferences,  
such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and  
Service Bulletins  
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service  
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors  
product performance in the field. We then prepare  
bulletins for servicing our products better. You can  
get these bulletins, too.  
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the  
proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe  
costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs  
which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid  
future costly repairs.  
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new  
or unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker way  
to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician service  
your vehicle better.  
temperature settings.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle  
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is  
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions  
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,  
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,  
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR  
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely  
acquired during a crash investigation.  
Event Data Recorders  
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).  
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain  
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag  
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will  
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems  
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related  
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short  
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR  
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:  
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment  
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR  
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,  
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the  
special equipment, can read the information if they  
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.  
How various systems in your vehicle were operating  
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety  
belts were buckled/fastened  
Saturn will not access this data or share it with others  
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or,  
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;  
in response to an official request of police or similar  
government office; as part of Saturn’s defense of  
litigation through the discovery process; or, as required  
by law. Data that Saturn collects or receives may  
also be used for Saturn research needs or may be  
made available to others for research purposes, where  
a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific  
vehicle or vehicle owner.  
How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the  
accelerator and/or brake pedal  
How fast the vehicle was traveling  
This data can help provide a better understanding of  
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OnStar®  
Radio Frequency  
Identification (RFID)  
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to  
the OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar  
Terms and Conditions for information on data  
collection and use. See also OnStar® System  
on page 2-35 in this manual for more information.  
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions  
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system  
security, as well as in connection with conveniences  
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and  
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door  
openers. RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does not  
use or record personal information or link with any other  
Saturn system containing personal information.  
Navigation System  
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of  
the system may result in the storage of destinations,  
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip  
information. Refer to the navigation system  
operating manual for information on stored data  
and for deletion instructions.  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Headlamps Off in Park (P) ............................... 3-14  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Light (cont.)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mirrors (cont.)  
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-35  
PASS-Key® III+ .............................................. 2-17  
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ................................ 2-18  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-34  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service (cont.)  
S
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires (cont.)  
T
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-17  
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 2-18  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Renesas Network Card REG10J0052 0200 User Guide
Rotel Cassette Player RD845 User Guide
Rotel Radio RT 850 User Guide
Samsung Computer Monitor SyncMaste 721B User Guide
Samsung DVD Player M301 User Guide
Samsung Home Theater System AH68 02231A User Guide
Samsung Laptop NP300E4CA0CVE User Guide
Scag Power Equipment Lawn Mower SWZV User Guide
Sears Lawn Mower 24737638 User Guide
Sears Treadmill 63129739 User Guide